2001 Accord Coupe Online Reference Owner's...

2001 Accord Coupe Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.

Contents

Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i A Few Words About Safety ................................................................................................................. ii Your Vehicle at a Glance .....................................................................................................................2 Driver and Passenger Safety ..............................................................................................................5 Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System. Instruments and Controls ................................................................................................................. 55 Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls. Comfort and Convenience Features .............................................................................................. 117 How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features. Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 173What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo. Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 187The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer. Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 215The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer. Appearance Care.............................................................................................................................. 285Tips on cleaning and protecting your vehicle. Things to look for if your vehicle ever needs body repairs. Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 293This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them. Technical Information..................................................................................................................... 323ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information. Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 339A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us. Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 345How to order manuals and other technical literature. Index...................................................................................................................................................... I

Service Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.

Owner's Identification Form

The information and specificationsincluded in this publication were ineffect at the time of approval forprinting. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specificationsor design at any time without noticeand without incurring any obligationwhatsoever.

Si prefiere este Manual delPropietario en español, comuníquesecon el concesionario Honda o laoficina regional Honda de su zona.Vea la página .

This Owner’s Manual covers allmodels of the Accord Coupe. Youmay find descriptions of equipmentand features that are not on yourparticular model.

This Owner’s Manual should beconsidered a permanent part of thecar, and should remain with the carwhen it is sold.

341

Owner’s Identif ication

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your Honda, otherproperty, or the environment.

Several warranties protect your new Honda. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Honda is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your car so youcan refer to it at any time.

Maintaining your car according to the schedules given in this manual helpsto keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment. Whenyour car needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Honda dealer’s staff isspecially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your Honda. YourHonda dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answerany questions and concerns.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2001 Honda Accord was a wiseinvestment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Introduction

WARNING:

i

－

－

－

－－

－

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

These signal words mean:

preceded by a safety alert symbol and one ofthree signal words: , , or .

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thiscar safely is an importantresponsibility.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your car. You must useyour own good judgement.

on the car.

how to use this car correctly and safely.

A Few Words About Safety

Safety Section

Safety Headings

Safety MessagesSafety Labels

Instructions

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

ii

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

Your Car at a Glance

2

DDIIGGIITTAALL CCLLOOCCKK

AAUUDDIIOO SSYYSSTTEEMM

PPOOWWEERR WWIINNDDOOWWSSWWIITTCCHHEESS

HHOOOODD RREELLEEAASSEEHHAANNDDLLEE

CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLLSSYYSSTTEEMM

HHEEAATTIINNGG//CCOOOOLLIINNGGCCOONNTTRROOLLSS

AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICC TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN

MMAANNUUAALL TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN((PP..110033))

((PP..117766))

((PP..119922))

((PP..119911))

((PP..113333,, 114488))

((PP..112255))

((PP..111188))

MMIIRRRROORRCCOONNTTRROOLLSS ((PP..5577))

IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT PPAANNEELL

((PP..110099))

((PP..110066))

PPOOWWEERR DDOOOORR LLOOCCKKSS((PP..8811))

FFUUEELL FFIILLLL DDOOOORR//TTRRUUNNKK RREELLEEAASSEE HHAANNDDLLEE((PP..117755//8866))

Your Car at a Glance

3

WWIINNDDSSHHIIEELLDDWWIIPPEERRSS//WWAASSHHEERRSS

TTIILLTT AADDJJUUSSTTMMEENNTT HHOORRNN

HHAAZZAARRDD WWAARRNNIINNGG LLIIGGHHTTSS

RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWW DDEEFFOOGGGGEERRIINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT PPAANNEELL BBRRIIGGHHTTNNEESSSS

MMOOOONNRROOOOFF SSWWIITTCCHH

CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL

HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTTSS//TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALLSS CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL

((PP.. 6699))

((PP.. 110055))

((PP.. 220022))

((PP.. 7744))

((PP.. 6677,, 6699))

((PP.. 7733)) ((PP.. 6666))

((PP.. 117700))((PP.. 7744))

((PP.. 7711))

RREEMMOOTTEE AAUUDDIIOO CCOONNTTRROOLLSS((oonn EEXX aanndd EEXX--VV66 mmooddeellss))

((PP.. 7722))((PP.. 7700,, 7711))

TTRRAACCTTIIOONN CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMMOONN//OOFFFF SSWWIITTCCHH ((oonn VV66 mmooddeellss))

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat beltsproperly. It explains your Supple-mental Restraint System. And it tellsyou how to properly restrain infantsand children in your car.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.............Your Car’s Safety Features . 7

.......................................Seat Belts . 8...........................................Airbags . 9

.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 10..........................Head Restraints . 10

..................................Door Locks . 10........Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 11

............................Protecting Adults . 12.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 12

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 14

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 155. Fasten and Position the Seat

.....................................Belts . 15....6. Adjust the Steering Wheel . 17

7. Maintain a Proper Sitting................................Position . 17

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18...Additional Safety Precautions . 19

........................Protecting Children . 20All Children Must Be

...............................Restrained . 20Children Should Sit in the Back

...........................................Seat . 21The Passenger’s Front Airbag

Poses Serious Risks...........................to Children . 21

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 24

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 24

...Additional Safety Precautions . 24General Guidelines for Using

...............................Child Seats . 25.......................Protecting Infants . 29

.........Protecting Small Children . 33.......Protecting Larger Children . 36

Using Child Seats with.....................................Tethers . 40

Additional Information About Your.................................Seat Belts . 41

..Seat Belt System Components . 41......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 41

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 43

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 44Additional Information About

...........................Your Airbags . 45........................SRS Components . 45

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 45

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 47How the SRS Indicator Light

.......................................Works . 48How The Side Airbag Indicator

............................Light Works . 49.............................Airbag Service . 50

...Additional Safety Precautions . 50.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 52

...................................Safety Labels . 53

Driver and Passenger Safety


5

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed the greater therisk, but serious accidents can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.A seat belt is your best protection in

all types of collisions. Airbagssupplement seat belts, but airbagsare designed to inflate only in amoderate to severe frontal collision.So even though your car is equippedwith airbags, make sure you andyour passengers always wear yourseat belts, and wear them properly.(See page .)

Children are safest when they areproperly restrained in the back seat,not the front seat. A child who is toosmall for a seat belt must be properlyrestrained in a child safety seat. (Seepage .)

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance. (See page .)

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual. (See page

.)

15

20

220

9


Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards Control Your Speed

Keep Your Car in Safe Condition

Restrain All Children

Don’t Drink and Drive

6

＊＊

＊＊

Your car is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

Some safety features do not requireany action on your part. Theseinclude a strong steel frameworkthat forms a safety cage around thepassenger compartment; front andrear crush zones that are designed tocrumple and absorb energy during acrash; a collapsible steering column;and seat belt tensioners thatautomatically tighten the front seatbelts in the event of a crash.

CONTINUED


Your Car’s Safety Features

7

((55))

((77))((66))

((22))

((33))((88))

((22))

((77))((44))

((88))

((11))

((99))

((1100))

((11)) SSaaffeettyy CCaaggee

((22)) CCrruusshh ZZoonneess

((33)) SSeeaattss && SSeeaatt--BBaacckkss

((44)) HHeeaadd RReessttrraaiinnttss

((55)) CCoollllaappssiibbllee SStteeeerriinngg CCoolluummnn

((66)) SSeeaatt BBeellttss

((77)) FFrroonntt AAiirrbbaaggss

((88)) SSiiddee AAiirrbbaaggss

((99)) SSeeaatt BBeelltt TTeennssiioonneerrss

((1100)) DDoooorr LLoocckkssIIff eeqquuiippppeedd

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

For your safety, and the safety ofyour passengers, your car isequipped with seat belts in all seatingpositions.

Your seat belt system alsoincludes a light on the

instrument panel to remind you andyour passengers to fasten your seatbelts.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your car has airbags.

These safety features are designedto reduce the severity of injuries in acrash. However, you and yourpassengers can’t take full advantageof these safety features unless youremain sitting in a proper positionand

In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

When properly worn, seat belts:



Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

always wear your seat beltsproperly.

8

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, evenif you have airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

Your car has a SupplementalRestraint System (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision.

Always wearyour seat belt, and make sure youwear it properly.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag, andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Some models also have side airbagsto help protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact.

CONTINUED



Airbags

What you should do:

9

Head restraints can help protect youfrom whiplash and other injuries. Formaximum protection, the back ofyour head should rest against thecenter of the head restraint.

Move the frontseats as far back as possible, andkeep adjustable seat-backs in anupright position whenever the car ismoving.

Keeping your doors locked reducesthe chance of being thrown out ofthe car during a crash. It also helpsprevent occupants from accidentallyopening a door and falling out, andoutsiders from unexpectedly openingyour doors.

Your car’s seats are designed to keepyou in a comfortable, uprightposition so you can take fulladvantage of the protection offeredby seat belts and the energyabsorbing materials in the seats.

How you adjust your seats and seat-backs can also affect your safety. Forexample, sitting too close to thesteering wheel or dashboardincreases the risk of you or yourpassenger being injured by strikingthe inside of the car, or by aninflating airbag.

Reclining a seat-back too far reducesthe seat belt’s effectiveness andincreases the chance that the seat’soccupant will slide under the seatbelt in a crash and be seriouslyinjured.

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force andspeed. So while airbags help savelives, they can cause minor injuries,or more serious or even fatalinjuries if occupants are notproperly restrained or sittingproperly.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel ordashboard.



Head Restraints

Door Locks

Seats & Seat-Backs What you should do:

Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, rollovers, or minorfrontal or side collisions.

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

What you should do:

10

All adults, and children who haveoutgrown child safety seats, arewearing their seat belts andwearing them properly (see page

).

Any infant or small child isproperly restrained in a child seatin the back seat (see page ).

To make sure you and yourpassengers get the maximumprotection from your car’s safetyfeatures, check the following eachtime before you drive away:

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in severecrashes, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.Head restraints are properly

adjusted (see page ).

Front seat occupants are sittingupright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel anddashboard (see page ).

All cargo is properly stored orsecured (see page ).

Seat-backs are upright (see page).

Both doors are closed and locked(see page ).12

15

20

13

14

15

184


Pre-Drive Safety Checklist


11

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver and other adultoccupants.

These instructions also apply tochildren who have outgrown childseats and are large enough to wearlap/shoulder belts. (See page forimportant additional guidelines onhow to properly protect largerchildren.)

After everyone has entered the car,be sure the doors are closed andlocked.

Your car has a door monitor light onthe instrument panel to indicatewhen a specific door is not tightlyclosed.

For safety, locking the doors reducesthe chance that a passenger,especially a child, will open a doorwhile the car is moving andaccidentally fall out. It also reducesthe chance of someone being thrownout of the car during a crash.

For security, locked doors canprevent an outsider fromunexpectedly opening a door whenyou come to a stop.

See page for how to lock thedoors.

36

81


Protecting Adults

Introduction Close and Lock the Doors1.

12

Most shorter drivers can get farenough away from the steeringwheel and still reach the pedals.However, if you are concerned aboutsitting too close, we recommend thatyou investigate whether some typeof adaptive equipment may help.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked in position.

See page for how to adjust thefront seats.

To reduce the chance of injury, wearyour seat belt properly, sit uprightwith your back against the seat, andmove the seat as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel while stillmaintaining full control of the car.Also make sure your front seatpassenger moves the seat as far tothe rear as possible.

Any driver who sits too close to thesteering wheel is at risk of beingseriously injured or killed by strikingthe steering wheel or from beingstruck by an inflating front airbagduring a crash.

94


Protecting Adults

Adjust the Front Seats2.

13

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

See page for how to adjust seat-backs.

A front passenger should also adjustthe seat-back to an upright position,but as far from the dashboard aspossible. A passenger who sits tooclose to the dashboard could beinjured if the front airbag inflates.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel. If yousit too close to the steering wheel,you could be injured if the frontairbag inflates.

94


Protecting Adults

Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

14

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position and sit wellback in the seat.

CONTINUED

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Also checkthat the belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints.

Before driving, make sure everyonewith an adjustable head restraint hasproperly positioned the headrestraint. The restraint should bepositioned so the back of theoccupant’s head rests against thecenter of the restraint. A tallerperson should adjust the restraint ashigh as possible.

99

Protecting Adults


Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

Adjust the Head Restraints 5.4.

15

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

If a seat belt does not seem to workas it should, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

Anyone using a seat belt that isnot working properly can beseriously injured or killed. Have yourHonda dealer check the belt as soonas possible.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsystem and how to take care of yourbelts.

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack from theshoulder part, then check that thebelt rests across the center of yourchest and over your shoulder. Thisspreads the forces of a crash overthe strongest bones in your upperbody.

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

41

Protecting Adults


Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one shouldsit in a seat with an inoperative seatbelt.

16

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured bystriking interior parts of the car, orby being struck by an inflating frontairbag. Being struck by an inflatingside airbag can result in possiblyserious injuries.

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and put on seat belts, it isvery important that they continue tosit upright, well back in their seats,with their feet on the floor, until thecar is parked and the engine is off.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

Adjust the steering wheel, if needed,so that the wheel points toward yourchest, not toward your face.

Pointing the steering wheel towardyour chest provides optimalprotection from the airbag.

See page for how to adjust thesteering wheel.

73

CONTINUED


Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

Adjust the Steering Wheel 7.6.

Protecting Adults

17

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

Pregnant women should also situpright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel ordashboard. This will reduce the riskof injuries to both the mother andher unborn child that can be causedby a crash or an inflating airbag.

Each time you have a check-up, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

Because protecting the mother is thebest way to protect her unborn child,a pregnant woman should alwayswear a seat belt whenever she drivesor rides in a car.

Remember to keep the lap portion ofthe belt as low as possible acrossyour hips.

Remember, to get the bestprotection from your car’s airbagsand other safety features, you mustsit properly and wear your seat beltproperly.

Protecting Adults


Advice for Pregnant Women

18

If yourhands or arms are close to theairbag cover in the center of thesteering wheel or on top of thedashboard, they could be injured ifthe front airbags inflate.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

Any objectattached to or placed on the coversmarked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ in thecenter of the steering wheel andon top of the dashboard couldinterfere with the proper operationof the airbags. Or, if the airbagsinflate, the objects could bepropelled inside the car and hurtsomeone.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canseverely compromise theprotective capability of the seatbelt and increase the chance ofserious injury in a crash.

If a side airbaginflates, a cup holder or other hardobject attached on or near thedoor could be propelled inside thecar and hurt someone.

Protecting Adults


Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Two people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

On the models with side airbags,do not attach hard objects on ornear a door.

Additional Safety Precautions

19

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many parents and otheradults may not know how toprotect young passengers.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be restrainedwhenever they ride in a vehicle.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof death of children ages 12 andunder.

So if you have children, or if you everneed to drive with a grandchild orother children in your car, be sure toread this section.

properly

All Children Must Be Restrained

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety20

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt.

(See page.)

(See page.)

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in theback seat, not the front seat. TheNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenages 12 and under be properlyrestrained in the back seat.

In the back seat, children are lesslikely to be injured by striking hardinterior parts during a collision orhard braking. Also, children cannotbe injured by an inflating airbagwhen they ride in the back.

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it inflates with tremendousspeed.

25

36

CONTINUED

Any child who is too small to wear aseat belt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat.

A larger child should always berestrained with a seat belt.

Protecting Children


Children Should Sit in the BackSeat

The Passenger’s Front AirbagPoses Serious Risks to Children

21

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, properly restrained with a seatbelt. (See page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren.)

36

InfantsNever put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

Small ChildrenPlacing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.

Protecting Children


To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin the back seat, your car haswarning labels on the dashboard andon the driver’s and front passenger’svisors. Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

To remind you of the front airbaghazards, your car has warning labelson the driver’s and front passenger’svisors. Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

U.S. Models Canadian Models

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety 23

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards fromthe passenger’s front airbag, andpaying close attention to a childdistracts the driver from theimportant tasks of driving, placingboth of you at risk.

If a child requires physical attentionor frequent visual contact, westrongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in the backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear a seat beltproperly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

Your car has three seating positionsin the back seat where children canbe properly restrained.

If you ever have to carry more thanthree children in your car:

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous. Forexample, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Andchildren left alone with the key inthe ignition can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

17

15

36

13

Additional Safety PrecautionsIf a Child Requires CloseAttention

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren Do not leave children alone in your

vehicle.

Protecting Children


Children up to about oneyear old should be restrained in arear-facing, reclining child seat. Onlya rear-facing seat provides theproper support to protect an infant’shead, neck, and back. See page

for additional information onprotecting infants.

The following pages give generalguidelines for selecting and installingchild seats for infants and smallchildren.

To provide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

The child seat shouldmeet Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard 213 (FMVSS 213)or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213 (CMVSS 213). Lookfor the manufacturer’s statementof compliance on the box and seat.

Children who play in cars canaccidentally get trapped inside thetrunk. Teach your children not toplay in or around cars. Know howto operate the emergency trunkopener (U.S. models only) anddecide if your children should beshown how to use this feature (seepage ).

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignition,and open the trunk, which canlead to accidental injury or death.

29

87

CONTINUED

Infants:

Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should meet safetystandards. The child seat should be of the

proper type and size to fit the child.

Lock both doors and the trunkwhen your vehicle is not in use.

Keep car keys and remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

1.2.

General Guidelines for UsingChild Seats

Protecting Children


Before purchasing a child seat, werecommend that parents test thechild seat in the specific vehicleseating position (or positions) wherethey intend to use the seat. If apreviously purchased child seat doesnot fit, you may need to buy adifferent one that will fit.

Due to variations in the design ofchild seats, vehicle seats, and seatbelts, all child seats will not fit allvehicle seating positions.

A child who is toolarge for a rear-facing child seat, andwho can sit up without support,should be restrained in a forward-facing child seat. See page foradditional information on protectingsmall children.

However, Honda is confident thatone or more child seat models can fitand be properly installed in allrecommended seating positions inyour car.

33

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

Small Children:

3.

Protecting Children


If a small child must ride in thefront, follow the instructionsprovided in this section.

The passenger’s front airbaginflates with enough force to killor seriously injure an infant in arear-facing child seat.

A small child in a forward-facingchild seat is also at risk. If thevehicle seat is too far forward,or the child’s head is thrownforward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can kill orseriously injure the child.

This page briefly summarizesHonda’s recommendations on whereto place rear-facing and forward-facing child seats in your car.

Never in the front seat, dueto the front airbag hazard.

Not recommended,due to the front airbag hazard. If asmall child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position and secure a front-facing child seat with the seat belt(see page ).

Recommended positions.Secure a rear-facing child seatwith the seat belt (see page ).

Recommendedpositions. Secure a front-facingchild seat with the seat belt (seepage ).

34

30

34CONTINUED

Placing a Child Seat Front Passenger’s SeatInfants:

Small children:

Back SeatsInfants:

Small children:

Airbags Pose SeriousRisks to Children

Protecting Children


After selecting a proper child seat,and a good position to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be thrown out of the seat in acrash and be seriously injured.

To provide security during normaldriving maneuvers as well as duringa collision, we recommend thatparents secure a child seat as firmlyas possible.

However, a child seat does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ In some vehiclesor seating positions, it may bedifficult to install a child seat so thatit does not move at all. Some side-to-side or back-and-forth movement canbe expected and should not reducethe child seat’s effectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly securedin the desired seating position.

When you are not using a child seat,either remove it and store it in a safeplace, or make sure it is properlysecured. An unsecured child seat canbe thrown around the car during acrash or sudden stop and injuresomeone.

All child seatsmust be secured to the car withthe lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.A child whose seat is not properlysecured to the car can beendangered in a crash. See pages

and for instructions on howto secure child seats in this car.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure.

30 34

Installing a Child Seat Secure the child in the child seat.

Storing a Child Seat

Secure the child seat to the carwith a seat belt.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

1.

2.

3.

Protecting Children


Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back. Infants up to aboutone year of age must be restrained ina rear-facing child seat.

In this car, a rear-facing child seatcan be placed in any seating positionin the back seat, but not in the frontseat.

We recommend that an infant berestrained in a rear-facing child seatuntil the infant reaches the seatmaker’s weight or height limit and isable to sit up without support.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

If the passenger’sfront airbag inflates, it can hit theback of the child seat with enoughforce to kill or seriously injure aninfant. If an infant must be closelywatched, we recommend thatanother adult sit in the back seatwith the baby.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

CONTINUED

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Rear-Facing Child Seat Placement

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat.

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Protecting Children


Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death if thepassenger’s front airbag inflates.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

With the child seat in the desiredback seating position, route thebelt through the child seataccording to the seat maker’sinstructions, then insert the latchplate into the buckle.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor (you might hear aclicking noise as the belt retracts).

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked andyou will need to repeat these steps.

The lap/shoulder belts in the backseats have a locking mechanism thatmust be activated to secure a childseat.

The following pages provideinstructions and tips on how tosecure a rear-facing child seat withthis type of seat belt.

1. 2.

3.

Rear-Facing Child Seat Installation

Protecting Children


After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat, whilepulling up on the belt.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism and remove a child seat,unlatch the buckle, unroute the seatbelt, and let the belt fully retract.

4. 5.

CONTINUED

Protecting Children


If you are not wearing a seat beltin a crash, you could be thrownforward into the dashboard andcrush the infant.

If you are wearing a seat belt, theinfant can be torn from your armsduring a crash. For example, ifyour car crashes into a parkedvehicle at 30 mph (48 km/h), a20-lb (9 kg) infant will become a600-lb (275 kg) force, and you willnot be able to hold on.

In either case, we recommend thatyou place the child seat directlybehind the front passenger seat,move the front seat as far forward asneeded, and leave it unoccupied. Oryou may wish to get a smaller childseat that allows you to safely carry afront passenger.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front-seat passenger frommoving the seat as far back asrecommended (see page ). Or itmay prevent them from locking theseat-back in the desired uprightposition (see page ).

To achieve the desired recliningangle, it may help to put a rolled uptowel under the toe of the child seat,as shown.

For proper protection, an infant mustride in a reclined, or semi-reclinedposition. To determine the properreclining angle, check with the baby’sdoctor or follow the seat maker’srecommendations.

During a crash, thebelt could press deep into theinfant and cause very seriousinjuries.

13

14

Additional Precautions for InfantsNever hold an infant on your lap.

Rear-Facing Child Seat InstallationTips

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand an infant.

Protecting Children


A child who can sit up withoutsupport, and who fits within the childseat maker’s weight and heightlimits, should be restrained in aforward-facing, upright child seat.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

We also recommend that a smallchild stay in the child seat as long aspossible, until the child reaches theweight or height limit for the seat.

In this car, the best place to install aforward-facing child seat is in one ofthe seating positions in the back seat.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to causevery serious or fatal injuries. If asmall child must be closely watched,we recommend that another adult sitin the back seat with the child.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the car, and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

CONTINUED

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Child Seat Placement

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Protecting Children


Improperly placing a forward-facing child seat in the frontseat can result in serious injuryor death if the front airbagsinflate.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible and properly restrainthe child.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor (you might hear aclicking noise as the belt retracts).

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked andyou will need to repeat these steps.

The lap/shoulder belts in the backand front passenger seating positionshave a locking mechanism that mustbe activated to secure a child seat.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to secure aforward-facing child seat with thistype of seat belt.

1. 2.

3.

Child Seat Installation

Protecting Children


After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure. Itmay help to put weight on thechild seat, or push on the back ofthe seat, while pulling up on thebelt.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism in order to remove achild seat, unlatch the buckle,unroute the seat belt, and let the beltfully retract.

4. 5.

CONTINUED

Protecting Children


When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in the back seat andwear a lap/shoulder belt.

If you are not wearing a seatbelt in a crash, you could bethrown forward into thedashboard and crush the child.

During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause very serious injuries.

If you are wearing a seat belt, thechild can be torn from your armsduring a crash. For example, ifyour car crashes into a parkedvehicle at 30 mph (48 km/h), a30-lb (14 kg) child will become a900-lb (410 kg) force, and you willnot be able to hold on.

If a child is too short for the shoulderpart of the belt to properly fit, werecommend that the child use abooster seat until the child is tallenough to use the seat belt without abooster.

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in the front seat.

Protecting Larger ChildrenAdditional Precautions for SmallChildren

Never hold a small child on yourlap.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child.

Protecting Children


Allowing a larger child to sitimproperly in the front seat canresult in injury or death if thepassenger’s front airbag inflates.

If a larger child must sit in front,make sure the child moves theseat as far back as possibleand wears the seat belt properly.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt, severelycompromise the protective capabilityof the seat belt and increase thechance of serious injury in a crash.

If they do, they couldbe very seriously injured in a crash.

However, if the belt touches orcrosses the child’s neck, the childneeds to use a booster seat.

This could result inserious neck injuries during a crash.

This could causevery serious injuries during a crash.It also increases the chance that thechild will slide under the belt in acrash and be injured.To determine if a lap/shoulder belt

properly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt. Follow theinstructions on page . Then checkhow the belt fits.

If the shoulder part of the belt restsover the child’s collarbone andagainst the center of the chest, asshown, the child is large enough towear the seat belt.

15

CONTINUED

Do not put any accessories on a seatbelt.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the back orunder the arm.

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Protecting Children


The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenages 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

The back seat is the safest place fora child of any age or size.

In addition, the passenger’s frontairbag poses serious risks to children.If the seat is too far forward, or thechild’s head is thrown forwardduring a collision, or the child isunrestrained or out of position, aninflating front airbag can kill orseriously injure the child.

The side airbag also poses risks. Ifany part of a larger child’s body is inthe path of a deploying airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of the ears areeven with the top of the seat-back. Achild of this height should be tallenough to use the lap/shoulder beltwithout a booster.

Whichever style you select, followthe booster seat maker’s instructions.

If a child needs a booster seat, werecommend choosing a style thatallows the child to use the lap/shoulder belt directly, without ashield, as shown.

When Can a Larger Child Sit in FrontUsing a Booster Seat

Protecting Children


Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Carefully read the owner’s manualand make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in thefront, there are other importantfactors you should consider.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit over the hips, chest, andshoulder (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,the child should not sit in the front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly positioned and secured.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

15 36

Physical Size

Maturity

Protecting Children


Your car has three tether anchoragepoints under the rear window forsecuring a tether-style child seat tothe car.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

The tether anchorage points arelocated under plastic covers. Pivotthe cover backward to access theanchorage point.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchorage point as shown inthe illustration, then tighten thestrap according to the child seatmaker’s instructions.

Using Child Seats with Tethers

Protecting Children


CCOOVVEERR

This seat belt has a single belt thatgoes over your shoulder, across yourchest and across your hips.

To unlock the belt, push the redPRESS button on the buckle.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched.

Guide the belt across your body tothe door pillar. After exiting the car,be sure the belt is out of the way andwill not get closed in the door.

The seat belt system alsoincludes a light on the

instrument panel to remind you andyour passengers to fasten your belts.If the driver’s seat belt is notfastened before the ignition is turnedON (II), the light will come on and abeeper will also sound. The beeperwill stop after a few seconds, but thelight will stay on until the driver’sseat belt is fastened.

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all five seatingpositions. The front seat belts arealso equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners.

CONTINUED

Seat Belt System Components Lap/Shoulder Belt

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts


See page for instructions on howto wear the lap/shoulder beltproperly.

The seat belts in all seating positionsexcept the driver’s have an additionallocking mechanism that must beactivated to secure a child seat. (Seepages and for instructions onhow to secure child seats with thistype of seat belt.)

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockingmechanism will activate. The beltwill retract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism, unlatch the buckle andlet the seat belt fully retract. Torefasten the belt, pull it out only asfar as needed.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

15

30 34



The SRS indicator light willcome on if there is a

problem with your automatic seatbelt tensioners (see page ).

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in place.

The tensioners are designed toactivate primarily in frontal collisions.The tensioners are independent ofthe airbag system, so they can beactivated during a collision thatmight not cause the airbags todeploy. In this case, the airbagswould not be needed but theadditional seat belt tension can behelpful.

The tensioners will be activated in acollision severe enough to cause thefront airbags to inflate.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled in the normalway.

48



Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

43

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthat the lap/shoulder belts retracteasily. Any belt not in good conditionor not working properly will notprovide good protection and shouldbe replaced as soon as possible.

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,you should have your dealer inspectthe belt, and replace it if necessary.A belt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed.

Honda provides a lifetimewarranty on seat belts. Honda willrepair or replace any seat beltcomponent that fails to functionproperly during normal use. Pleasesee your

booklet for details.

Automatic seat belt tensioners thatdeployed during a crash must bereplaced.

For information on how to clean yourseat belts, see page .289

Honda WarrantyInformation



Seat Belt Maintenance

U.S. Models

44

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

Your Supplemental Restraint System(SRS) includes:

Two front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG.’’

Automatic seat belt tensioners(see page ).

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe frontalcollision.

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, and driver andpassenger seat belt use when theignition is ON (II).

An indicator light on theinstrument panel that alerts you toa possible problem with thesystem (see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour car’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, the sensorswill detect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration. If the rate ofdeceleration is high enough, thecontrol unit will instantly inflate thefront airbags.

4348

CONTINUED

SRS Components How Your Front Airbags Work


Additional Information About Your Airbags

45

The total time for inflation anddeflation is approximately one-tenthof a second, so fast that mostoccupants are not aware that theairbags deployed until they see themlying in their laps.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe car as soon as it is safe to do so.

For additional information on howyour airbags work, see the booklettitled

that came with yourowner’s manual.After inflating, the front airbags

immediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

For additional information on howyour airbags work, ask your dealerfor a copy of the booklet titled

During a frontal crash, your seatbelts help restrain your lower bodyand torso. Your airbag provides acushion to help restrain and protectyour head and chest.

Since both airbags use the samesensors, both airbags normallyinflate at the same time. However, itis possible for only one airbag toinflate.

This can occur when the severity ofa collision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

SRS: What You Need to KnowAbout Airbags

SRS:What You Need to Know About Airbags.

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners



46

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, the sensors willdetect rapid deceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag.

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

Some models are equipped with sideairbags for the driver and a frontseat passenger. The airbags arestored in the outer edges of the frontseat-backs, and both are marked‘‘SIDE AIRBAG.’’



How Your Side Airbags Work

47

If the SRS indicator light does notcome on after you turn the ignitionON (II).

If the light stays on after theengine starts.

If the light comes on or flashes onand off while you drive.

The SRS indicator lightalerts you to a potential

problem with your front airbags.This light will also alert you to apotential problem with yourautomatic seat belt tensioners (page

).

If the light comes on at any othertime, or does not come on at all, youshould have the system checked byyour dealer. For example:

If you see any of these indications,your front or side airbags may notdeploy, your passenger’s side airbagautomatic cutoff system may notwork properly, or your seat belttensioners may not work when youneed them. See your Honda dealeras soon as possible.

On models with side airbags, thislight will also alert you to a potentialproblem with your side airbags orpassenger’s side airbag automaticcutoff system (see page ).

When you turn the ignition ON (II),this indicator will light briefly thengo out. This tells you that the systemis working properly.

43

49

How the SRS Indicator LightWorks



Ignoring the SRS indicator lightcan result in serious injury ordeath if the airbags, cutoffsystem, or tensioners do notwork properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS light alerts you to apotential problem.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

If a small-statured adult leanssideways, or larger adult slouchesand leans sideways into thedeployment path of the side airbag,the system may also shut off the sideairbag. When you turn the ignition ON (II),

the indicator should light briefly andgo out (see page ). If it doesn’tlight, stays on, or comes on whiledriving without a passenger in thefront seat, have the system checked.

If the side airbag indicator lightcomes on, you should have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the deploymentpath of the side airbag, the systemwill turn the airbag back on and thelight will go out.

To reduce the risk of injury from aninflating side airbag, your car has anautomatic cutoff system for thepassenger’s side airbag.

Although Honda does not encouragechildren to ride in the front, thissystem is designed to shut off theside airbag if a child leans sidewaysand the child’s head is in the sideairbag deployment path.

This light alerts you thatthe passenger’s side airbag

has been automatically shut off.60

Only on models equipped with sideairbags


How The Side Airbag IndicatorLight Works


49

Your front and side airbag systems(if equipped) are virtuallymaintenance-free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have your carserviced if:

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

If rain or spilled watersoaks into a seat-back, it canprevent the side airbag systemfrom working properly.

Take your car to anauthorized Honda dealer as soonas possible. If you ignore thisindication, the airbags might notinflate when you need them.

Anyairbag that has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. Donot try to remove or replace anyairbag by yourself. This must bedone by a Honda dealer or aknowledgeable body shop.


Airbag Service Additional Safety Precautions


Do not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not expose the front seat-backsto water.

The SRS indicator light alerts youto a problem.

Your airbags ever inflate.

50

Improperlyreplacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your sideairbags from inflating during acollision.

See page for further informationand precautions relating to yourairbags.

183


Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consulting aHonda dealer.


51

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

Select the Fresh Air mode.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

Your car’s exhaust contains carbonmonoxide gas. You should have noproblem with carbon monoxideentering the car in normal driving ifyou maintain your car properly.Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

The car is raised for an oil change.You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.The car was in an accident thatmay have damaged the underside.

With the trunk lid open, air flow canpull exhaust gas into your car’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetrunk lid open, open all the windowsand set the heating and coolingsystem/climate control system asshown below.

If you must sit in your parked car,even in an unconfined area, with theengine running, adjust the heatingand cooling system/climate controlsystem as follows:

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard


Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read, contact your Honda dealerfor a replacement.

U.S. models only

U.S. models Canadian models

On cars without Side Airbags

On cars with Side Airbags

Safety Labels


RADIATOR CAP

HOOD

SUN VISOR

DASHBOARD

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour Honda. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 56...............................Indicator Lights . 57

.............................................Gauges . 63...............................Speedometer . 63

.................................Tachometer . 63.....................................Odometer . 63...................................Trip Meter . 64

...................Temperature Gauge . 64..................................Fuel Gauge . 64

Maintenance Required...................................Indicator . 65

Controls Near the Steering.......................................Wheel . 66

...................................Headlights . 67Automatic Lighting Off

.....................................Feature . 68............Daytime Running Lights . 68

....Instrument Panel Brightness . 69................................Turn Signals . 69

.....................Windshield Wipers . 70..................Windshield Washers . 71

..........................Hazard Warning . 71.............Rear Window Defogger . 72

......Steering Wheel Adjustment . 73...............Steering Wheel Controls . 74

.............................Cruise Control . 74.............Remote Audio Controls . 77

...............................Keys and Locks . 77..............................................Keys . 77

....................Immobilizer System . 78............................Ignition Switch . 80

......................Power Door Locks . 81................Lockout Prevention . 82

...................Remote Transmitter . 83...........................................Trunk . 86

........Emergency Trunk Opener . 87....................................Glove Box . 88

HomeLink Universal.................................Transmitter . 89

............................Seat Adjustments . 94.............Front Seat Adjustments . 94

Driver’s Seat Manual Height..............................Adjustment . 95

Driver’s Seat Power Height..............................Adjustment . 95

Driver’s Seat Power............................Adjustments . 96

...........Driver’s Lumbar Support . 97........................Rear Seat Access . 98

..........................Head Restraints . 99.....................Folding Rear Seat . 100

..................................Seat Heaters . 102............................Power Windows . 103

.......................................Moonroof . 105...........................................Mirrors . 106

..Adjusting the Power Mirrors . 106...............................Parking Brake . 108

..................................Digital Clock . 109........................Sunglasses Holder . 109

...........................Beverage Holder . 110.................Console Compartment . 111

........................................Sun Visor . 112................................Vanity Mirror . 112

........................................Coin Box . 113...............................Center Pocket . 113

.............Accessory Power Socket . 113...............................Interior Lights . 114..............................Ceiling Light . 114

...................................Spotlights . 114........................Courtesy Lights . 115

Instruments and Controls

Instruments and Controls 55

Control Locations

Instruments and Controls56

PPOOWWEERR WWIINNDDOOWWSSWWIITTCCHHEESS

HHOOOODD RREELLEEAASSEEHHAANNDDLLEE

MMIIRRRROORRCCOONNTTRROOLLSS

DDIIGGIITTAALL CCLLOOCCKK

AAUUDDIIOO SSYYSSTTEEMM

CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLLSSYYSSTTEEMM

PPOOWWEERR DDOOOORRLLOOCCKKSS((PP..8811))

((PP..110033))

((PP..117766))((PP..113333,, 114488))

((PP..112255))

HHEEAATTIINNGG//CCOOOOLLIINNGGCCOONNTTRROOLLSS((PP..111188))

((PP..110099))((PP..110066))

FFUUEELL FFIILLLL DDOOOORR//TTRRUUNNKKRREELLEEAASSEE HHAANNDDLLEE((PP..117755//8866))

＊

＊＊

＊＊

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

Indicator Lights


CCHHAARRGGIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

LLOOWW OOIILL PPRREESSSSUURREE IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

HHIIGGHH BBEEAAMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR SSUUPPPPLLEEMMEENNTTAALL RREESSTTRRAAIINNTT SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

DDOOOORR AANNDD BBRRAAKKEE LLAAMMPP MMOONNIITTOORR

LLOOWW FFUUEELL IINNDDIICCAATTOORR SSEEAATT BBEELLTT RREEMMIINNDDEERRLLIIGGHHTT

CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEERREEQQUUIIRREEDDIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

TTRRAACCTTIIOONN CCOONNTTRROOLLSSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

MMAALLFFUUNNCCTTIIOONNIINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLAAMMPP

((PP.. 6622))

((PP.. 6622))

((PP.. 6600))

((PP.. 6655))

((PP.. 5588,, 330099))

((PP.. 5588,, 331100))

((PP.. 6622))((PP.. 5588))

((PP.. 6611))

((PP.. 6600))

IIMMMMOOBBIILLIIZZEERR SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR((PP.. 5599))

AANNTTII--LLOOCCKK BBRRAAKKEE SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR((PP.. 5599))

PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE AANNDD BBRRAAKKEESSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR((PP.. 5599))

SSIIDDEE AAIIRRBBAAGGIINNDDIICCAATTOORR((PP.. 6600))

((PP.. 331111))

UU..SS.. VV--66 mmooddeell iiss sshhoowwnn..

The engine can be severely damagedif this light flashes or stays on whenthe engine is running. For completeinformation, see page .

If this light comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For completeinformation, see page .

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). It is areminder to you and your passengersto protect yourselves by fasteningthe seat belts. A beeper also soundsif you have not fastened your seatbelt.

If you do not fasten your seat belt,the beeper will stop after a fewseconds but the light stays on untilyou do. Both the light and the beeperstay off if you fasten your seat beltbefore turning on the ignition.

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your car.

309

310

Indicator Lights


Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Seat Belt Reminder Light

58

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch ON (II). It will then go off ifyou have inserted a properly-codedignition key. If it is not a properly-coded key, the indicator will blinkand the engine will not start (seepage ).

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0).

This light normally comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II), and whenthe ignition switch is turned toSTART (III). If this light comes on atany other time, there is a problem inthe ABS. If this happens, take thecar to your dealer to have it checked.With the light on, your car still hasnormal braking ability but no anti-lock. For complete information, seepage .

This light has two functions:

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch ON (II). Itis a reminder to check the parkingbrake. Driving with the parkingbrake not fully released candamage the brakes and tires.

If the indicator remains lit afteryou have fully released theparking brake while the engine isrunning, or if it comes on whiledriving, it can indicate a problemin the brake system. For completeinformation, see page .

See page .201

1.

2.

78

313

311

Only on models equipped with ABS (seepage )200

Indicator Lights


Immobilizer SystemIndicator

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

Parking Brake andBrake System Indicator

59

U.S. CanadaU.S. Canada

This indicator has three functions:

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the TractionControl System.

It flashes when the TCS isregulating wheelspin.

If it comes on and stays on whenthe Traction Control System is on,it indicates that there is a problemin the TCS.

This light also comes on when youturn the ignition ON (II) and goes offafter the engine starts. See page

for more information on theTCS.

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates a potential problem withyour front airbags or automatic seatbelt tensioners. On models equippedwith side airbags, this light will alsoalert you to a potential problem withyour side airbags or passenger’s sideairbag automatic cutoff system. Forcomplete information, see page .

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates that the passenger’s sideairbag has automatically shut off.For complete information, see page

.

1.

2.

3.

202

49

48


On all V6 models

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

Side Airbag IndicatorTraction Control System(TCS) Indicator

Indicator Lights


Canadian models onlyThis indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) withthe headlight switch off and theparking brake set. It should go off ifyou turn on the headlights or releasethe parking brake. If it comes on atany other time, it means there is aproblem with the DRL. There mayalso be a problem with the highbeam headlights.

The left or right turn signal lightblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If the light does not blink orblinks rapidly, it usually means oneof the turn signal bulbs is burned out(see page ). Replace the bulb assoon as possible, since other driverscannot see that you are signalling.

A burned out brake light is a hazardwhen drivers behind you cannot tellyou are braking. Have your brakelights repaired right away.

The appropriate light comes on inthis display if the trunk or eitherdoor is not closed tightly. If a brakelight does not work, the

indicator comes on when youpush the brake pedal with theignition switch ON (II).

All the lights in the monitor displaycome on when you turn the ignitionswitch ON (II). The lights go offafter the engine starts and the trunkand both doors are closed tightly.

When you turn on the HazardWarning switch, both turn signallights blink. All turn signals on theoutside of the car should flash.

274

‘‘Daytime RunningLights’’ Indicator

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

Door and Brake Lamp Monitor

Indicator Lights


BRAKELAMP

This light comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this light come on(see page ).

On Canadian models, this indicatorcomes on with reduced brightnesswhen the Daytime Running Lights(DRL) are on (see page ).

This lights when you set the cruisecontrol. See page for informationon operating the cruise control.

This light comes on as a reminderthat you must refuel soon.

This light comes on with the highbeam headlights. See page forinformation on the headlightcontrols.

67

68

74

242

Canadian models only

Washer Level IndicatorHigh Beam Indicator

Cruise Control Indicator

Low Fuel Indicator

Indicator Lights


This shows your speed in miles perhour (mph). The smaller innernumbers are the speed in kilometersper hour (km/h).

The tachometer shows the enginespeed in revolutions per minute(rpm). To protect the engine fromdamage, never drive with thetachometer needle in the red zone.

The odometer shows the total dis-tance your car has been driven. Itmeasures miles in U.S. models andkilometers in Canadian models.The total number is displayed whenyou turn the ignition switch ON (II).It is illegal under U.S. federal law andCanadian provincial regulations todisconnect, reset, or alter theodometer with the intent to changethe number of miles or kilometersindicated.

This shows your speed in kilometersper hour (km/h). The smaller innernumbers are the speed in miles perhour (mph).

U.S. ModelsCanadian ModelsSpeedometer

Tachometer

Odometer

Gauges


U.S. Model shown

63

SSPPEEEEDDOOMMEETTEERR

MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEERREEQQUUIIRREEDD IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREEGGAAUUGGEE

TTAACCHHOOMMEETTEERR FFUUEELL GGAAUUGGEE

TTRRIIPP MMEETTEERR SSEELLEECCTT//RREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONN

TTRRIIPP MMEETTEERR OODDOOMMEETTEERR

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

The gauge stays at the same fuellevel reading after you turn off theignition. When you add fuel, thegauge slowly changes to the newreading after you turn the ignitionswitch back ON (II).

The needle returns to the bottomafter you turn off the ignition. Thegauge shows the fuel level readingimmediately after you turn theignition switch back ON (II).

This shows how much fuel you have.It is most accurate when the car is onlevel ground. It may show slightlymore or less than the actual amountwhen you are driving on curvy orhilly roads.

This meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it.

There are two trip meters: Trip Aand Trip B. Switch between thesedisplays by pressing the Select/Reset button repeatedly. Each tripmeter works independently, so youcan keep track of two differentdistances.

To reset a trip meter, display it, andthen press and hold the Select/Resetbutton until the number resets to‘‘0.0’’.

Both trip meters will reset if the car’sbattery goes dead or is disconnected.

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should risefrom the bottom white mark to aboutthe middle of the gauge. In severedriving conditions, such as very hotweather or a long period of uphilldriving, the pointer may rise to nearthe upper red mark. If it reaches thered (Hot) mark, pull safely to theside of the road. Turn to page forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine’s coolingsystem.

306

Trip Meter Temperature Gauge Fuel Gauge

Gauges


－

Refer to the Maintenance Schedulesfor Normal and Severe DrivingConditions on pages .

For the first 6,000 miles (9,600 km)after the Maintenance RequiredIndicator is reset, it will come on fortwo seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II).

This indicator reminds you that it istime to take your car in forscheduled maintenance.

Between 6,000 miles (9,600 km) and7,500 miles (12,000 km) thisindicator will light for two secondswhen you first turn the ignitionswitch ON (II), and then flash forten seconds.

If you exceed 7,500 miles (12,000km) without having the scheduledmaintenance performed, thisindicator will remain on as a constantreminder.

Your dealer will reset this indicatorafter completing the scheduledmaintenance. If this maintenance isdone by someone other than yourHonda dealer, reset the indicator asfollows.

Turn off the engine.

Press and hold the select/resetbutton in the instrument panel,then turn the ignition switch ON(II).

Hold the button until the indicatorresets (approximately tenseconds).

1.

2.

3.220 224

Maintenance Required Indicator

Gauges


MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE RREEQQUUIIRREEDDIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSEELLEECCTT//RREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONN

＊＊

＊

The two levers on the steeringcolumn contain controls for drivingfeatures you use most often. The leftlever controls the turn signals,headlights, and high beams. Theright lever controls the windshieldwashers and wipers.

The tilt adjustment lever on theunderside of the steering columnallows you to tilt the steering wheel.

The switches for the hazard warninglights and rear window defogger arelocated to the right of the steeringcolumn.

To use the horn, press the padaround the ‘‘H’’ logo.

The controls under the left air ventare for the moonroof, cruise control,and the TCS.

:

Controls Near the Steering Wheel


HHAAZZAARRDD WWAARRNNIINNGG LLIIGGHHTTSS

HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTTSS//TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALLSS

CCRRUUIISSEECCOONNTTRROOLL

MMOOOONNRROOOOFFSSWWIITTCCHH

WWIINNDDSSHHIIEELLDDWWIIPPEERRSS//WWAASSHHEERRSS

RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWWDDEEFFOOGGGGEERR

HHOORRNN

RREEMMOOTTEE AAUUDDIIOOCCOONNTTRROOLLSS

TTIILLTT AADDJJUUSSTTMMEENNTT

TTRRAACCTTIIOONNCCOONNTTRROOLLSSYYSSTTEEMM OONN//OOFFFF SSWWIITTCCHH

EEXX--VV66 mmooddeell iiss sshhoowwnn..

If you leave the lights on with theignition switch in ACCESSORY (I)or LOCK (0), you will hear areminder chime when you open thedriver’s door.

The rotating switch on the left levercontrols the lights. Turning thisswitch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turnson the parking lights, taillights,instrument panel lights, side-markerlights, and rear license plate lights.Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights.

To change between low beams andhigh beams, pull the turn signal leveruntil you hear a click, then let go.The blue high beam indicator willlight (see page ).

To flash the high beams, pull theturn signal lever back lightly, thenrelease it. The high beams will comeon and go off.

The high beams will stay on for aslong as you hold the lever back, nomatter what position the headlightswitch is in.

62

Headlights



With the headlight switch off, thehigh beam headlights come on withreduced brightness when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) andrelease the parking brake. Theyremain on until you turn the ignitionoff, even if you set the parking brake.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

The Automatic Lighting Off featureturns off the headlights, parkinglights, taillights, side marker lights,license plate lights and instrumentpanel lights within 15 seconds ofremoving the key from the ignitionswitch and closing the driver’s door.

The lights will turn on again whenyou unlock or open the driver’s door.If you unlock the door, but do notopen it within 15 seconds, the lightswill go off. With the driver’s dooropen, you will hear a lights-onreminder chime.

This feature activates if you leavethe headlight switch in the ‘‘ ’’or ‘‘ ’’ position, remove the key,open, then close the driver’s door.

If you remove the key from theignition switch with the headlightswitch on, but do not open the doorand get out, the lights will turn offafter ten minutes.

On EX and EX-V6 modelsDaytime Running Lights(Canadian Models)

Automatic Lighting Off Feature



To signal a lane change, push lightlyon the turn signal lever in the properdirection and hold it. The lever willreturn to the center position as soonas you release it.

Signal a turn or lane change with thislever. Push down on the lever tosignal a left turn, and up to signal aright turn. If you push it up or downall the way, the turn signal continuesto blink even when you release thelever. It shuts off automatically asyou complete the turn.

Turn the knob on the left side of theinstrument panel to adjust thebrightness of the instrument panellights.

Turn SignalsInstrument Panel Brightness



TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL LLEEVVEERRKKNNOOBB

The right lever controls the wind-shield wipers and washers. Therotary switch at the end of the leverhas three positions:

INT: intermittent: low speed: high speed

If you turn the INT TIME ring to theshortest delay, the wipers willchange from intermittent to lowspeed operation when vehicle speedexceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).

You can vary how often the wiperssweep the windshield by turning theINT TIME ring next to the rotaryswitch.

In intermittent, the wipers operateevery few seconds. The sweepinterval will change slightly withspeed; getting shorter as you drivefaster. In low speed and high speed,the wipers run continuously.

Windshield Wipers



To clean the windshield, pull back onthe wiper control lever. The washersspray until you release the lever. Thewipers run at low speed while you’repulling the lever, then complete onemore sweep of the windshield afteryou release it.

To operate the wipers in mist mode,push the control lever down. Thewipers run at high speed until yourelease the lever. This gives you aquick way to clear the windshield.

Push the button to the left of theclock to turn on the hazard warninglights (four-way flashers). Thiscauses all four outside turn signalsand both indicators in the instrumentpanel to flash. Use the hazardwarning lights if you need to park ina dangerous area near heavy traffic,or if your car is disabled.

Hazard WarningWindshield Washers



Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The light abovethe button lights to show thedefogger is on. If you do not turn itoff, the defogger will shut itself offafter about 15 minutes. It also shutsoff when you turn off the ignition.You have to turn it on again whenyou restart the car.

The defogger and antenna wires onthe inside of the rear window can beaccidentally damaged. Whencleaning the glass, always wipe sideto side.

Rear Window Defogger



EEXX--VV66 mmooddeellLLXX,, EEXX aanndd LLXX--VV66 mmooddeellss

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in that position.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up and down.

To adjust the steering wheel upwardor downward:

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

Move the steering wheel to thedesired position, making sure thewheel points toward your chest,not toward your face. Make sureyou can see the instrument panelgauges and the indicator lights.

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

See page for important safetyinformation about how to properlyposition the steering wheel.

3.

4.

1.

2.

17Steering Wheel Adjustment



Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thecar and be seriously injured in acrash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the car is stopped.

Push in the Cruise Control MasterSwitch to the left of the steeringcolumn. The indicator in theswitch will light.

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forconditions such as city driving,winding roads, slippery roads, heavyrain, or bad weather. You shouldhave full control of the car underthose conditions.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

1. 2.

Cruise Control Using the Cruise Control

Steering Wheel Controls


CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL MMAASSTTEERR SSWWIITTCCHH

66--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss

CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL MMAASSTTEERR SSWWIITTCCHH


Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

Push on the accelerator pedal. Ac-celerate to the desired cruisingspeed and press the SET/decelbutton.

To increase your speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RESUME/accel button repeatedly. Each timeyou do this, your car will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RESUME/accel button. The car will acceler-ate. When you reach the desiredcruising speed, release the button.

The cruise control may not hold theset speed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down to the desired speed. Thiswill cancel the cruise control. Toresume the set speed, press theRESUME/accel button. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel comes on.

When climbing a steep hill, theautomatic transmission maydownshift to hold the set speed.

Press and release the SET/decelbutton on the steering wheel. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel comes on toshow the system is now activated.

3.

CONTINUED

Changing the Set Speed



RREESSUUMMEE//aacccceell

CCAANNCCEELL

SSEETT//ddeecceell

You can cancel the cruise control inany of these ways:

Tap the brake or clutch pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

Press the Cruise Control MasterSwitch.

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The carwill return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake orclutch pedal will cause the cruisecontrol to cancel.

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the SET/decelbutton. The car will decelerate.Release the button when youreach the desired speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/decelbutton repeatedly. Each time youdo this, your car will slow downabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Tap the brake or clutch pedallightly with your foot. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel will go out.When the car slows to the desiredspeed, press the SET/decel button.The car will then maintain thedesired speed.

Cancelling the Cruise Control



CCAANNCCEELLBBUUTTTTOONN

Your car comes with two masterkeys and a valet key.The master key fits all the locks onyour car:• Ignition• Doors• Trunk• Trunk release handle• Rear seat trunk access• Glove box

These buttons let you control somefunctions of the audio system with-out removing your hands from thewheel. Refer to page for a com-plete explanation.

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake or clutch pedal, theCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel will go out and thecar will begin to slow down. You canuse the accelerator pedal in thenormal way.

The system remembers thepreviously-set cruising speed. Toreturn to that speed, accelerate toabove 25 mph (40 km/h), then pressand release the RESUME/accelbutton. The CRUISE CONTROLlight comes on, and the car willaccelerate to the same cruisingspeed as before.

Pressing the Cruise Control MasterSwitch turns the system completelyoff and erases the previous cruisingspeed from memory. To use thesystem again, refer to

.

170

CONTINUED

On EX and EX-V6 models

KeysRemote Audio Controls

Using theCruise Control

Steering Wheel Controls, Keys and Locks


VVAALLEETTKKEEYY((GGRREEYY))

MMAASSTTEERRKKEEYY((BBLLAACCKK))

KKEEYYNNUUMMBBEERRPPLLAATTEE

The Immobilizer System protectsyour car from theft. A properly-coded master or valet key must beused in the ignition switch for theengine to start. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used,the engine’s fuel system is disabled.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the Immobilizer Systemindicator should come on for a fewseconds, then go out. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0), remove the key, reinsertit, and turn the switch to ON (II)again.

Some models also come with tworemote transmitters; see page foran explanation of their operation.

The keys do not contain batteries.Do not try to take them apart.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry them immedi-ately with a soft cloth.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theImmobilizer System. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

The valet key works only in theignition and the door locks. You cankeep the trunk, trunk release handle,rear seat trunk access and the glovebox locked when you leave your carand the valet key at a parking facility.

You should have received a keynumber plate with your keys. Youwill need this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Keepthe plate stored in a safe place. If youneed to replace a key, use onlyHonda-approved key blanks.

83

Immobilizer System

Remote Transmitter

Keys and Locks


The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object is near theignition switch when you insert thekey. To make sure the systemrecognizes the key code:

Do not keep other immobilizerkeys on the same key ring.

Use a plastic or leather key fob,not metal.

Keep other keys away from yourcar’s key and the ignition switchwhile trying to start the engine.

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your Honda dealer.

This indicator will also blink severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0).

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour car undriveable.

If you have lost your key and youcannot start the engine, contact yourHonda dealer.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Keys and Locks


－

The ignition switch is on the rightside of the steering column. It hasfour positions:• LOCK (0)• ACCESSORY (I)• ON (II)• START (III)

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To switch from ACCESSORY toLOCK, you must push the key inslightly as you turn it. If your car hasan automatic transmission, the shiftlever must also be in Park. The anti-theft lock will lock the steeringcolumn when you remove the key.

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may sometimes makeit difficult to turn the key fromLOCK to ACCESSORY. Firmly turnthe steering wheel to the left or tothe right as you turn the key.

Ignition Switch LOCK (0)

Keys and Locks


Removing the key from theignition switch while drivinglocks the steering. This cancause you to lose control.

Remove the key from theignition switch only whenparked.

－－

－

Each door has a master door lockswitch. Either switch locks andunlocks both doors. Push the switchdown to lock both doors and up tounlock them.

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to ON (II) when you let go ofthe key.

The engine will not start if theImmobilizer System does notrecognize the key’s coding (see page

).

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

In this position,you can operate the audio systemand the accessory power socket.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. All featuresand accessories on the car are usable.Several of the lights on the instru-ment panel come on as a test whenyou turn the ignition switch fromACCESSORY to ON.

78

CONTINUED

Power Door LocksSTART (III)ACCESSORY (I)

ON (II)

Keys and Locks


MMAASSTTEERR DDOOOORR LLOOCCKK SSWWIITTCCHH

If you forget and leave the key in theignition switch, Lockout Preventionwill not allow you to lock the driver’sdoor. With the driver’s door openand the key in the ignition, bothmaster door lock switches aredisabled. However, if the driver’sdoor is not open, the master doorlock switches are not disabled.Pushing the switch down on theopen passenger’s door will lock bothdoors. If you try to lock an opendriver’s door by pushing down thelock tab, the tabs on both doors popup. Pushing down the lock tab on thepassenger’s door only locks that door.

Each door has a lock tab at the top ofthe door. When you push down thelock tab on the driver’s door, bothdoors lock. Pulling up the lock tab onthe driver’s door only unlocks thatdoor. The lock tab on the passenger’sdoor only locks and unlocks thatdoor.

To lock the passenger’s door whengetting out of the car, push the locktab down and close the door. To lockthe driver’s door, remove the keyfrom the ignition switch and pushthe lock tab down or push the masterswitch down, then close the door.

Both doors can be locked from theoutside by using the key in eitherdoor.

To unlock only the driver’s doorfrom the outside, insert the key inthe driver’s door lock, turn the keyand release it. If you turn the keyand hold it, both doors will unlock.Both doors will unlock when youunlock the passenger’s door with thekey.

Lockout Prevention

Keys and Locks


LLOOCCKK TTAABB

You can lock and unlock your carwith the remote transmitter. Whenyou push the LOCK button, bothdoors lock. The parking lights, sidemarker lights, and taillights flashonce.

The trunk will not open if the key isin the ignition switch.

The ceiling light (if the ceiling lightswitch is in the center position) willcome on when you press theUNLOCK button. If you do not openeither door, the light stays on forabout 10 seconds, then fades out. Ifyou relock the doors with the remotetransmitter before 10 seconds haveelapsed, the light will go offimmediately.

When you push the UNLOCK buttononce, only the driver’s door unlocks.The passenger’s door unlocks whenyou push the button a second time.The parking lights, side markerlights, and taillights flash twice.

When you push the LOCK button asecond time within 5 seconds afteryou have locked the doors, the hornwill sound once to verify that thesecurity system will be set.

To open the trunk, push the TrunkRelease button for approximatelyone second.

You cannot lock or unlock the doorswith the remote transmitter if eitherdoor is not fully closed or the key isin the ignition switch.

If you unlock the doors with theremote transmitter, but do not openeither door within 30 seconds, thedoors automatically relock and thesecurity system sets.

CONTINUED


Remote Transmitter

Keys and Locks


LLEEDD

UUNNLLOOCCKKBBUUTTTTOONN

LLOOCCKKBBUUTTTTOONN

PPAANNIICCBBUUTTTTOONN

TTRRUUNNKKRREELLEEAASSEEBBUUTTTTOONN

When the remote transmitter’sbattery begins to get weak, it maytake several pushes on the button tolock or unlock the doors, and theLED will not light. Replace thebattery as soon as possible.

Battery type: CR2025

To cancel Panic mode before 30seconds, press any button on theremote transmitter. You can alsoturn the ignition switch to ON (II). To replace the battery, place a cloth

on the edge of the transmitter andremove the upper half by carefullyprying on the edge with a small flat-tip screwdriver.

Panic mode allows you to remotelyactivate your car’s security system toattract attention. When activated, thehorn will sound, and the exteriorlights will flash, for about 30 seconds.To activate panic mode, press andhold the PANIC button for about twoseconds.

Replacing the BatteryPanic Mode

Keys and Locks


＋

Avoid severe shock to the trans-mitter, such as dropping or throwingit. Also, protect it from extreme hotor cold temperatures.

Clean the transmitter case with asoft cloth. Do not use strongcleaners or solvents that could harmthe case. Immersing the transmitterin any liquid will harm the trans-mitter and cause it to not functionproperly.

Remove the old battery and note thepolarity. Make sure the polarity ofthe new battery is the same ( sidefacing up), then insert it in thetransmitter.

If you lose a transmitter, you willneed to have the replacementprogrammed to your car’s system byyour Honda dealer. Any othertransmitters you have will also needto be reprogrammed.Snap the two halves of the

transmitter case back together.




Transmitter Care

Keys and Locks


BBAATTTTEERRYY

Use the master key to open thetrunk lock. The valet key does notwork in this lock.

To close the trunk, press down onthe trunk lid.

See page for cargo loading andweight limit information. Keep thetrunk lid closed at all times whiledriving to avoid damaging the lid,and to prevent exhaust gas fromgetting into the interior. See

on page .

Pull the trunk release handle tothe left of the driver’s seat.

Press the trunk release button onthe remote transmitter.

You can open the trunk in two orthree ways:

184

52

Trunk

CarbonMonoxide Hazard

Keys and Locks


TTRRUUNNKK RREELLEEAASSEE HHAANNDDLLEE MMAASSTTEERR KKEEYY

To protect items in the trunk whenyou need to give the key to someoneelse:

Lock the trunk release handlewith the master key.

Give the person the valet key.

As a safety feature, your car has arelease lever on the trunk latch sothe trunk can be opened from theinside.

Parents should decide if theirchildren should be shown how to usethis feature.

For more information about childsafety, see pages and .

To open the trunk, push the releaselever to the left.

1.

2.

24 25

Keys and Locks


Emergency Trunk Opener

U.S. models only

87

MMAASSTTEERR KKEEYY

RREELLEEAASSEELLEEVVEERR

Open the glove box by squeezing thehandle. Close it with a firm push.Lock or unlock the glove box withthe master key.

The glove box light comes on onlywhen the instrument panel lights areon.

Glove Box

Keys and Locks


GGLLOOVVEE BBOOXX

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

The HomeLink UniversalTransmitter built into your car canbe programmed to operate remotely-controlled devices around your home,such as garage doors, lighting, orhome security systems. It canreplace up to three remotetransmitters.

If your garage door opener wasmanufactured before April 1982, youmay not be able to program theHomeLink Universal Transmitter tooperate it. Garage door openersmanufactured before that date donot have a safety feature that causesthem to stop and reverse if anobstacle is detected during closing,increasing the risk of injury. If youhave questions, call (800) 355-3515.

Always refer to the operatinginstructions and safety informationthat came with your garage dooropener or other equipment youintend to operate with the HomeLinkUniversal Transmitter. If you do nothave this information, you shouldcontact the manufacturer of theequipment.

While training or using thetransmitter, make sure you have aclear view of the garage door or gate,and that no one will be injured by itsmovement.

If you have problems with trainingthe HomeLink UniversalTransmitter, or would likeinformation on home products thatcan be operated by the transmitter,call (800) 355-3515. On the Internet,go to www.homelink.jci.com.

If you are training the transmitter tooperate a garage door or gate, it isrecommended that you unplug themotor for that device during training.Repeatedly pressing the remotecontrol button could burn out themotor.

The HomeLink transmitter storesthe code in a permanent memory.There should be no need to retrainthe transmitter if your car’s batterygoes dead or is disconnected.

On EX-V6 model

Customer Assistance

Important Safety Precautions General Information

HomeLink Universal Transmitter


－Before you can use the HomeLinkUniversal Transmitter to operatedevices around your home, it must‘‘learn’’ the proper codes. Forexample, to train the transmitter toopen and close the garage door:

Select the transmitter button youwant to train.

Press the button on the remotecontrol and the button on thetransmitter at the same time. Holddown both buttons.

If you are training the second orthird buttons, go directly to Step 1.

Unplug the garage door openermotor from the house current.

If you just tookdelivery of your vehicle and have nottrained any of the buttons in theHomeLink transmitter before, youshould erase any previously learnedcodes before training the first button.To do this, press and hold the twooutside buttons on the HomeLinktransmitter for about 20 seconds,until the red light flashes. Releasethe buttons, then proceed to Step 1.

Hold the end of the garage dooropener remote control 2 to 5inches from the HomeLinktransmitter. Make sure you arenot blocking your view of the redlight in the transmitter.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Training the Transmitter



Before you begin

90

Canadian Owners:The remote control you are trainingfrom may stop transmitting after twoseconds. This is not long enough forthe HomeLink transmitter to learnthe code. Release and press thebutton on the remote control everytwo seconds until the transmitter haslearned the code.

The red light in the transmittershould begin flashing. It will flashslowly at first, then rapidly.

When the red light flashes rapidly,release both buttons. Thetransmitter should have learnedthe code from the remote control.

Plug in the garage door openermotor, then test the transmitterbutton by pushing it. It shouldoperate the garage door.

For security purposes, newer garagedoor opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’or variable code. Information fromthe remote control and the garagedoor opener are needed before theHomeLink transmitter can operatethe garage door opener.

The‘‘Training the Transmitter’’procedure trains the HomeLinktransmitter to the proper garagedoor opener code. The followingprocedure synchronizes theHomeLink transmitter to the garagedoor opener so they send andreceive the correct codes.

If the button does not work, repeatthis procedure to train it again. If it

still does not work, you may have avariable or rolling code garagedoor opener. Test this by pressingand holding the HomeLinktransmitter button you just trained.If the red light blinks for twoseconds, then stays on, you have arolling code garage door opener.You may be able to verify this withthe manufacturer’s documentation.Go to ‘‘Training With a RollingCode System.’’

Repeat these steps to train theother two transmitter buttons tooperate any other remotely-controlled devices around yourhome (lighting, automatic gate,security system, etc.).

5.

6.

7.

8.

CONTINUED

Training With a Rolling CodeSystem



It may be helpful to have someoneassist you with this procedure.

Make sure you have properlycompleted the ‘‘Training theTransmitter’’ procedure.

Find the ‘‘Training’’ button on yourgarage door opener unit. Thelocation will vary, depending onthe manufacturer. Themanufacturer’s documentationmay help.

Press the Training button on thegarage door opener unit until thelight next to the button comes on,then release it. The light may blink,or come on and stay on. You thenhave approximately 30 seconds tocomplete the following steps.

Press and release the button onthe HomeLink transmitter. (Thesame button you trained with the‘‘Training the Transmitter’’procedure.)

Press and release the HomeLinktransmitter button again. Thisshould turn off the training lighton the garage door opener unit.(Some systems may require you topress and release the button up tothree times.)

Press the transmitter button again.It should operate the garage door.

6.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.



TTRRAAIINNIINNGGBBUUTTTTOONN




To train an already programmedtransmitter button to operate a newdevice:

Select the transmitter button youwant to train.

Press and hold the transmitterbutton until the red light begins toflash slowly (approximately 20seconds).

While continuing to hold thetransmitter button, place theremote control for the device 2 to5 inches from the HomeLinktransmitter.

Press and hold the button on theremote control. Hold both buttonsuntil the red light begins to flashrapidly.

Release both buttons. Thetransmitter should now be trainedto operate the device.

To erase the codes stored in all threebuttons, press and hold the twooutside buttons until the red lightbegins to flash, then release thebuttons.

You should erase all three codesbefore selling the car.

3.

5.

4.

1.

2.

Retraining a Button

Erasing Codes



－See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

13 14

To adjust the seat forward andbackward, pull up on the lever underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position andrelease the lever. Try to move theseat to make sure it is locked inposition.

To change the angle of the seat-back,pull up on the lever on the outside ofthe seat bottom. Move the seat-backto the desired position and releasethe lever. Let the seat-back latch inthe new position.

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

Front Seat Adjustments

Seat Adjustments


The height of your driver’s seat isadjustable. Turn the front dial on theoutside of the seat cushion to raisethe front of the seat bottom and turnthe rear dial to raise the rear.

Make all adjustments before youstart driving.

The height of your driver’s seat ispower adjustable. Pull up on theswitch to raise the seat. Push it downto lower the seat.

Make all adjustments before youstart driving.

On LX model On EX model

Driver’s Seat Manual HeightAdjustment

Driver’s Seat Power HeightAdjustment

Seat Adjustments


－

Pull up or push down on the front ofthe switch to move the seat bottom’sfront edge up or down. Pull up orpush down on the rear of the switchto move the rear of the seat bottomup or down.

Push the horizontal switch forwardor backward to move the seatforward or backward.

The two power seat adjustmentswitches are on the outside edge ofthe seat bottom. The horizontalswitch adjusts the seat bottom inseveral directions. The short verticalswitch adjusts the seat-back angle.

You can adjust the seat with theignition switch in any position. Makeall seat adjustments before you startdriving.

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

On all V6 models and the 4-cylinder EXmodel with leather interior

13 14

Driver’s Seat Power Adjustments

Seat Adjustments


Pull the center of the horizontalswitch up to raise the seat. Push itdown to lower the seat.

Adjust the seat-back angle bypushing the rear switch in thedirection you want to move. Vary the lumbar support by moving

the lever on the right side of theseat-back. Move the lever forward orbackward to adjust the lumbarsupport through its full range.


Driver’s Lumbar Support

Seat Adjustments


To get into the rear seat on thedriver’s side, open the door and pullthe release lever up on the side ofthe seat-back. The seat-back will tiltforward to allow easier entry to therear seat.

To get into the rear seat on thedriver’s side, open the door and pullup on the seat-back adjustment lever.The seat-back will tilt forward toallow easier entry to the rear seat.

To get into the rear seat on thepassenger’s side, push forward onthe release lever at the base of theseat-back. The seat-back will tiltforward and the entire seat will moveforward to allow easier entry to therear seat. After you return the seat-back to the upright position, pushthe whole seat backwards until itlatches. Make sure the seat is fullylatched before sitting in it.

On all V6 models and the 4-cylinder EXmodel with leather interior

On LX and EX models

Rear Seat AccessDriver’s Side Passenger’s Side

Seat Adjustments


RREELLEEAASSEE LLEEVVEERRSSEEAATT--BBAACCKK AADDJJUUSSTTMMEENNTT LLEEVVEERRRREELLEEAASSEE LLEEVVEERR

To remove a head restraint forcleaning or repair, pull it up as far asit will go. Push the release buttonand pull the restraint out of the seat-back.

The front head restraints helpprotect you and your passenger fromwhiplash and other injuries. They aremost effective when you adjust themso the back of the occupant’s headrests against the center of therestraint. A taller person shouldadjust the restraint as high aspossible. The front head restraints adjust for

height. You need both hands toadjust the restraint. Do not attemptto adjust it while driving. To raise it,pull upward. To lower the restraint,push the release button sidewaysand push the restraint down.

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning about how toproperly position the head restraints.

15Head Restraints

Seat Adjustments


RREELLEEAASSEEBBUUTTTTOONN

When storing cargo, you can movethe rear center shoulder belt out ofthe way by removing the belt fromthe guide.

The back of the rear seat folds downto give you direct access to the trunk.Each side folds down separately.With only half the seat folded, youcan still carry a passenger in theback seat. The seat-back can bereleased from inside the car or insidethe trunk.

To fold down either side of the seat-back from inside the car, insert themaster key in the lock on the rearshelf. To fold down the driver’s side,turn the key clockwise, pull down thetop of the seat-back, then release thekey. To fold down the passenger’sside, turn the key counterclockwiseand perform the same procedure.

Folding Rear Seat

Seat Adjustments


MMAASSTTEERR KKEEYY CCEENNTTEERR SSHHOOUULLDDEERR BBEELLTT

GGUUIIDDEE

Make sure all rear shoulder belts arepositioned in front of the rear seat-back whenever the seat-back is in itsupright position.

Never drive with the seat-backfolded down and the trunk lid open.See onpage .

To lock the seat-back upright, push itfirmly against the trunk panel. Makesure it is latched in place by pullingon the top of the seat.

Make sure all items in the trunk, oritems extending through the openinginto the back seat, are secured.Loose items can fly forward andcause injury if you have to brakehard. See on page

.

To release the seat-back from insidethe trunk, pull the release under thetrunk panel. Push the seat-backdown, then let go of the release.

Do not put any heavy items on theseat-back when it is folded.

184

52Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Carrying Cargo

Seat Adjustments


RREELLEEAASSEE

In HI, the heater turns off when theseat gets warm, and turns back onafter the seat’s temperature drops. Itcontinues to cycle as long as youleave it set on HI. The HI indicatorremains lit as a reminder that youhave the heater on.

In LO, the heater runs continuously.It does not cycle with temperaturechanges.

Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters:

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly. Select the LOsetting when the seats feel warm.The HI setting draws largeamounts of current from thebattery.

Do not use the seat heaters, evenon the LO setting, if the engine isleft idling for an extended period.They can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

The HI or LO indicator lights andremains lit until you turn it off bypushing the opposite side of theswitch lightly. The indicator will turnoff.

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. The ignition must beON (II) to use them. Push the rightside of the switch, HI, to rapidly heatup the seat. After the seat reaches acomfortable temperature, select LOby pushing the left side of the switch.This will keep the seat warm.

Because of the sensors for the sideairbag system, there is no heater inthe passenger’s seat-back.

Standard on EX-V6 model and EX modelwith leather interior in Canada

Seat Heaters


SSEEAATT HHEEAATTEERRSS

The driver’s armrest has a masterpower window control panel. Toopen the passenger’s window, pushdown on the switch and hold it downuntil the window reaches the desiredposition. To close the window, pullback on the window switch. Releasethe switch when the window gets tothe position you want.

Your car’s windows are electrically-powered. Turn the ignition switch toON (II) to raise or lower any window.

Each door has a switch that controlsits window. To open the window,push the switch down and hold it.Release the switch when you wantthe window to stop. Close thewindow by pulling back on theswitch and holding it.

CONTINUED

Power Windows


DDRRIIVVEERR’’SS WWIINNDDOOWW SSWWIITTCCHH

MMAAIINN SSWWIITTCCHH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

－

The master control panel also con-tains these extra features:

To open the driver’s window onlypartially, push the window switchdown lightly and hold it. The windowwill stop as soon as you release theswitch.

To open the driver’swindow fully, push the windowswitch firmly down and release it.The window automatically goes allthe way down. To stop the windowfrom going all the way down, pullback on the window switch briefly.

The MAIN switch controls power tothe passenger’s window. With thisswitch off, the passenger’s windowcannot be raised or lowered. TheMAIN switch does not affect thedriver’s window. Keep the MAINswitch off when you have children inthe car so they do not injure them-selves by operating the windowunintentionally.

The power window system has a key-off delay function. The windows willstill operate for up to ten minutesafter you turn off the ignition.Opening either door cancels thedelay function. You must turn theignition switch ON (II) again beforeyou can raise or lower the windows.

The AUTO function only works tolower the driver’s window. To raisethe window, you must pull back onthe window switch and hold it untilthe window reaches the desiredposition.

The light inside the AUTO switchcomes on when you turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II).

AUTO

Power Windows


To tilt up the back of the moonroof,press and hold the center button( ). To close the moonroof,press and hold the top of the switch( ). To open the moonroof,press and hold the bottom of theswitch ( ). Release the switchwhen the moonroof gets to thedesired position. Make sureeveryone’s hands are away from themoonroof before opening or closingit.

The moonroof has a key-off delay.You can still open and close themoonroof for up to ten minutes afteryou turn off the ignition. The key-offdelay cancels as soon as you openeither door. You must then turn theignition ON (II) for the moonroof tooperate.

The moonroof has two positions: itcan be tilted up in the back forventilation, or it can be slid back intothe roof. Use the switch under theleft dashboard vent to operate themoonroof. The ignition switch mustbe ON (II).


Moonroof


MMOOOONNRROOOOFFSSWWIITTCCHH

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or motor.

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

Adjust the outside mirrors with theadjustment switch on the driver’sdoor armrest:

Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

3.

1.

2.

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

Mirrors


TTAABB

SSEELLEECCTTOORR SSWWIITTCCHH

AADDJJUUSSTTMMEENNTT SSWWIITTCCHH

The outside mirrors are heated to re-move fog and frost. With the ignitionswitch ON (II), turn on the heatersby pressing the button. The light inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off.

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns off theadjustment switch so you can’tmove a mirror out of position byaccidentally bumping the switch.

4.

Available on all Canadian models

Mirrors


HHEEAATTEEDD MMIIRRRROORR BBUUTTTTOONN

To apply the parking brake, pull thelever up fully. To release it, pull upslightly, push the button, and lowerthe lever. The parking brake light onthe instrument panel should go outwhen the parking brake is fullyreleased with the engine running(see page ).59


Parking Brake

108

PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE LLEEVVEERR

Driving the car with the parking brakeapplied can damage the rear brakesand axles.

The digital clock displays the timewith the ignition switch in anyposition.

To set the clock:

You can use R to quickly set the timeto the nearest hour. If the displayedtime is before the half hour, pressingR sets the clock back to the previoushour. If the displayed time is afterthe half hour, pressing R sets theclock forward to the beginning of thenext hour.

For example:1:06 would RESET to 1:00.1:52 would RESET to 2:00.

To open the sunglasses holder, pushon the front edge. It will unlatch andswing down. To close it, push it untilit latches. Make sure the holder isclosed while you are driving.

Press and hold the H button untilthe hour advances to the desiredtime.

Press and hold the M button untilthe numbers advance to thedesired time.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Digital Clock Sunglasses Holder

Digital Clock, Sunglasses Holder


RRMMHH

PPuusshh

SSUUNNGGLLAASSSSEESS HHOOLLDDEERR

Some larger styles of sunglassesmay not fit in the holder.

To open the beverage holder, pushon the top. The beverage holder lidis spring-loaded and will swing open.To close it, push it down until itlatches.

The inner liner can be removed ifyou want to hold a larger cup.

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holder. A spilled liquid thatis very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Spilled liquids can alsodamage the upholstery, carpeting,and electrical components in theinterior.

Beverage Holder

Sunglasses Holder, Beverage Holder


PPuusshh

IINNNNEERR LLIINNEERR

To open the console compartment,pull up on the lower lever and lift thelid.

To close, lower the lid and push itdown until it latches.

The console compartment has aCompact Disc holder.

You can put small items in the traylocated in the console compartmentlid. To use the tray, pull up on theupper lever and lift up the armrestpad.

The console compartment also has acoin holder in the front of the tray.


Console Compartment


LLEEVVEERR

CCOONNSSOOLLEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT

LLEEVVEERR

CCOOIINN HHOOLLDDEERR

To use the sun visor, pull it down.You can also use the sun visor at theside window. Remove the supportrod from the clip and swing the sunvisor toward the side window. In thisposition, the sun visor can beextended by sliding out theextension.

To use a vanity mirror on the back ofthe sun visor, pull up the cover.

The light beside the mirror comeson only when the parking lights areon.

Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the car. Do not use thesun visor extension over the rearview mirror.

Sun Visor Vanity Mirror

Sun Visor, Vanity Mirror


SSUUNN VVIISSOORR

EEXXTTEENNSSIIOONN

This socket is intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

It will not power an automotive typecigarette lighter element.

To use the accessory power socket,pull out on the cover. The ignitionswitch must be in ACCESSORY (I)or ON (II).

The coin box is located under the airvent. To open the coin box, pull thebottom edge. Close it with a firmpush.

The center pocket is located underthe audio system. To open the lid,pull it down. Close it with a firm push.

On LX and LX-V6 models

Accessory Power SocketCoin Box Center Pocket

Coin Box, Center Pocket, Accessory Power Socket


CCOOIINN BBOOXX AACCCCEESSSSOORRYY PPOOWWEERR SSOOCCKKEETT

Turn on the spotlight by pushing thebutton next to each light. Push thebutton again to turn it off. You canuse the spotlights at all times.

The ceiling light has a three-positionswitch. In the OFF position, the lightdoes not come on. In the centerposition, the ceiling light comes onwhen you open either door.

After both doors are closed tightly,the light dims slightly, then fades outin about 10 seconds.

The ceiling light (with the switch inthe center position) also comes onwhen you unlock the door with theremote transmitter (see page ).The light fades out after both doorsare closed.

In the ON position, the ceiling lightstays on continuously.

The light goes out when both doorsare closed.

83

EX, EX-V6


LX, LX-V6Ceiling Light Spotlights


Interior Lights

114

DDOOOORR AACCTTIIVVAATTEEDD

OOFFFF

OONN

The courtesy light in each doorcomes on when the door is opened,and goes out when the door is closed.

Your car also has a courtesy light inthe ignition switch. This light comeson when you open the driver’s door.It remains on for several secondsafter the door is closed.

Courtesy Lights

Interior Lights


DDOOOORR LLIIGGHHTT

IIGGNNIITTIIOONN SSWWIITTCCHH LLIIGGHHTT

The heating and air conditioningsystems in your Honda provide acomfortable driving environment inall weather conditions.

The standard audio system hasmany features. This section de-scribes those features and how touse them. (If you selected anoptional audio system, refer to theoperating instructions that camewith it.)

Your Honda has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code numberto enable it.

The security system helps to dis-courage vandalism and theft of yourHonda.

.....................Heating and Cooling . 118.........What Each Control Does . 118

............How to Use the System . 121..........To Turn Everything Off . 124

...............Climate Control System . 125.......Fully-automatic Operation . 127.......Semi-automatic Operation . 128

Sunlight Sensor/............Temperature Sensor . 132..........Audio System (LX, LX-V6) . 133

....AM/FM/CD Audio System . 133.................Operating the Radio . 134.................Adjusting the Sound . 138

............Audio System Lighting . 139.........Operating the CD Player . 140

.....Operating the CD Changer . 142....CD Player Error Indications . 143

CD Changer Error.............................Indications . 144

Operating the Cassette.....................................Player . 145

............Tape Search Functions . 146

..........Audio System (EX, EX-V6) . 148AM/FM/Cassette/

.CD Changer Audio System . 148.................Operating the Radio . 149.................Adjusting the Sound . 153

............Audio System Lighting . 154....................Radio Frequencies . 154

........................Radio Reception . 154Operating the Cassette

.....................................Player . 156............Tape Search Functions . 157

Caring for the Cassette.....................................Player . 160

.....Operating the CD Changer . 161Loading CDs in the

.............................Changer . 162...............................Operation . 164

Removing CDs from the.............................Changer . 166

.......Protecting Compact Discs . 168CD Changer Error

.............................Indications . 169...........Remote Audio Controls . 170

.......................Theft Protection . 171............................Security System . 172


Comfort and Convenience Features

Comfort and Convenience Features 117

Proper use of the Heating andCooling system can make theinterior dry and comfortable, andkeep the windows clear for bestvisibility.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe fan’s speed, which increases airflow.

This button turns the air condi-tioning ON and OFF. The indicatorabove the button lights when theA/C is on.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the air flow.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger on and off (see page ).

This button controls the source ofthe air going into the system. Whenthe indicator above this button is lit,air from the car’s interior is sentthrough the system again (Recircula-tion mode). When the indicator is off,air is brought in from outside the car(Fresh Air mode).

72

On LX, LX-V6 and EX models


Heating and Cooling

What Each Control Does

Fan Control Dial

Recirculation Button Rear Window Defogger Button

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Temperature Control Dial

118

TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREECCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL

FFAANN CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL MMOODDEE BBUUTTTTOONNSS

AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGGBBUUTTTTOONN

RREECCIIRRCCUULLAATTIIOONNBBUUTTTTOONN

RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWWDDEEFFOOGGGGEERR BBUUTTTTOONN

Use the MODE buttons to select thevents the air flows from. Some airwill flow from the dashboard cornervents in all modes.

Air flows from the floorvents.

Air flow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

Air flow is divided betweenthe floor vents and the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

When you select or ,the system automatically switches toFresh Air mode and turns on theA/C.

Heating and Cooling


Mode Buttons

119

The direction of air flow from thevents in the center and each side ofthe dashboard is adjustable.

To adjust the air flow from thecenter vent, move the tab up-and-down and side-to-side.

The vents in the corners of thedashboard can be opened and closedwith the dials underneath them.

On the driver’s-side vent, move thevent up-and-down and move the tabside-to-side. On the passenger’s-sidevent, move the tab up-and-down andmove the vent side-to-side.

Heating and Cooling


Vent Controls

120

CCEENNTTEERR VVEENNTT PPAASSSSEENNGGEERR’’SS--SSIIDDEE VVEENNTTDDRRIIVVEERR’’SS--SSIIDDEE VVEENNTT

CClloossee

OOppeennCClloossee

OOppeenn

CONTINUED

The flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then exhausts itthrough vents near the rear window.

Turn the temperature control dialall the way to the left.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

This section covers how to set up thesystem controls for ventilation,heating, cooling, dehumidifying, anddefrosting.

The engine must be running for theheater and air conditioning togenerate hot and cold air. The heateruses engine coolant to warm the air.If the engine is cold, it will be severalminutes before you feel warm aircoming from the system.

The air conditioning does not rely onengine temperature. The outside air intakes for the

heating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keepthese clear of leaves and otherdebris.

It is best to leave the system in FreshAir mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in Recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.Switch to Recirculation mode whenyou are driving through smoky ordusty conditions, then switch back toFresh Air mode when the condition

clears.

1.

2.3.

Heating and Cooling


Ventilation

How to Use the System

121


FFAANN CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL

AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG BBUUTTTTOONN

MMOODDEE BBUUTTTTOONNSS

RREECCIIRRCCUULLAATTIIOONN BBUUTTTTOONN

When the interior has cooled downto a more comfortable temperature,close the windows and set thecontrols as described for normalcooling.

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

) when driving in stop-and-gotraffic or climbing a long, steep hill.If it moves near the red zone, turnoff the A/C until the gauge readsnormally.

If the interior is very warm frombeing parked in the sun, you can coolit down more rapidly by setting upthe controls this way:

Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton. The light above the buttoncomes on when a fan speed isselected.Make sure the temperaturecontrol dial is all the way to the left.Select .If the outside air is humid, selectRecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

Start the engine.Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton. Make sure the tempera-ture control dial is turned all theway to the left.Set the fan to maximum speed.Open the windows partially. Select

and Fresh Air mode.

1.2.

3.4.

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

64


Heating and Cooling

To Cool with A/C

122


AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG BBUUTTTTOONNRREECCIIRRCCUULLAATTIIOONN BBUUTTTTOONN

MMOODDEE BBUUTTTTOONNSSFFAANN CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL

To warm the interior:Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry.

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

Start the engine.Select and Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial. Switch the fan on.

Turn on the air conditioning.Select and Fresh Air mode.Adjust the temperature controldial so the mixture of heated andcooled air feels comfortable.

Switch the fan on.Select .When you select , thesystem automatically switches toFresh Air mode and turns on theA/C.Adjust the temperature controldial so the air flow from thedefroster vents feels warm.Turn on the rear window defoggerto help clear the rear window.When you switch to another modefrom , the A/C stays on.Press the A/C button to turn it off.

1.2.3.4.

1.2.3.4.

1.2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Heating and Cooling


To Heat To Heat and Dehumidify with AirConditioning

To Defog and Defrost

123

For safety, make sure you have aclear view through all the windowsbefore driving away.

To shut off the system temporarily,turn the fan speed and temperaturecontrol dials all the way to the left.

You should shut the systemcompletely off only for the first fewminutes of driving in cold weather,until the engine coolant warms upenough to operate the heater. Keepthe fan on at all other times so staleair does not build up in the interior.

Start the engine.Select .When you select , thesystem automatically switches toFresh Air mode and turns on theA/C.Switch the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum.

To rapidly remove exterior frost orice from the windshield (on very colddays), first select the Recirculationmode. Once the windshield is clear,select the Fresh Air mode to avoidfogging the windows.

These settings direct all the air flowto the defroster vents at the base ofthe windshield and the side windowdefroster vents. The air flow will getwarmer and clear the windows fasteras the engine warms up. You canclose the side vents with the dialunderneath each vent. This will sendmore warm air to the windshielddefroster vents.

To remove exterior frost or ice fromthe windshield and side windowsafter the car has been sitting out incold weather:

1.2.

3.

Heating and Cooling


To Turn Everything Off

124

The automatic climate controlsystem in your Honda picks theproper combination of air condi-tioning, heating, and ventilation tomaintain the interior temperatureyou select. The system also adjuststhe fan speed and air flow levels.

The direction of air flow from thevents in the center and each side ofthe dashboard is adjustable.

To adjust the air flow from thecenter vent, move the tab up-and-down and side-to-side.

On the driver’s-side vent, move thevent up-and-down and move the tabside-to-side. On the passenger’s-sidevent, move the tab up-and-down andmove the vent side-to-side.

The side vents can be opened andclosed with the dials underneaththem.

CONTINUED

On EX-V6 model

Climate Control System


CCEENNTTEERR VVEENNTTSS DDRRIIVVEERR’’SS--SSIIDDEE VVEENNTT

CClloossee

OOppeenn

The climate control system draws airthrough the exterior vents at thebottom of the windshield. Keepthese vents clear of leaves and otherdebris.

For the climate control system toprovide heating and cooling, theengine must be running.


Comfort and Convenience Features126

PPAASSSSEENNGGEERR’’SS--SSIIDDEE VVEENNTT

CClloossee

OOppeenn

Pressing the OFF button shuts theclimate control system completelyoff. Keep the system completely offonly for short periods. To keep staleair and mustiness from collecting,you should have the fan running atall times.

When you set the temperature to itslower limit (60°F/18°C) or its upperlimit (90°F/32°C), the system runsat full cooling or heating only. It doesnot regulate the interior temperature.When the temperature is set

between the lower and upper limits,the system regulates the interiortemperature to the set value.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature from its current level tothe set temperature.

To put the Automatic ClimateControl in fully-automatic mode,press the AUTO button and set thefan control dial to AUTO, then setthe desired temperature by turningthe temperature control dial. You willsee FULL AUTO in the system’sdisplay. The light above the

button also shows you whichmode, Recirculation or Fresh Air, isselected.

In cold weather, the fan will notcome on automatically until the carhas been driven for a short time andthe heater starts to develop warm air.

Fully-automatic Operation




AAUUTTOO BBUUTTTTOONN

FFUULLLL AAUUTTOODDIISSPPLLAAYY

FFAANN CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL

OOFFFF BBUUTTTTOONN

You can manually select variousfunctions of the Climate Controlsystem when it is in FULL AUTO.All other features remain auto-matically controlled. Making anymanual selection causes the wordFULL to go out.

Press the A/C button to turn the airconditioning on and off. You will seeA/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.

When you turn the A/C off, the sys-tem cannot regulate the inside tem-perature if you set the dial below theoutside temperature. With the A/Con, use the temperature control dialto adjust the temperature of the airflow to a comfortable setting.

This button controls the source ofthe air going into the system. Whenthe indicator above this button is lit,air from the car’s interior is sentthrough the system again (Recircula-tion mode). When the indicator is off,air is brought in from outside the car(Fresh Air mode).

You can, for example, manually putthe system in recirculation modewhen driving through an area ofsmoke or fumes.

Semi-automatic Operation

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Recirculation Button



RREECCIIRRCCUULLAATTIIOONN BBUUTTTTOONN


AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG BBUUTTTTOONN

CONTINUED

You can manually select the fanspeed by turning the fan control dial.When you turn the dial clockwise,the fan is taken out of automaticmode and starts to run at its lowestspeed. Turning the dial fullyclockwise increases the fan’s speed,which increases air flow.

Use the MODE button to select thevents the air flows from. Some airwill flow from the dashboard cornervents in all modes. Each time youpress the MODE button, the displayshows the mode selected. Press thebutton four times to see all themodes.



Fan Control Dial

Mode Button

129

FFAANN CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALLMMOODDEE BBUUTTTTOONN

The main air flow is dividedbetween the dashboard vents andthe floor vents.

The main air flow is dividedbetween the floor vents and de-froster vents at the base of the wind-shield.

The main air flow comesfrom the floor vents.

The main air flow comesfrom the dashboard vents.



The button directs the mainair flow to the windshield for fasterdefrosting. It also overrides anyMODE selection you may have made.

When you turn off bypressing the button again, thesystem returns to its former settings.

When you select , the A/Cturns on automatically and thesystem selects Fresh Air mode. Forfaster defrosting, manually set thefan speed to high. You can alsoincrease air flow to the windshield byclosing the side vents in thedashboard.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger on and off (see page ).72

Rear Window Defogger Button



RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWW DDEEFFOOGGGGEERR BBUUTTTTOONN

The climate control system has twosensors. A sunlight sensor is locatedin the top of the dashboard and atemperature sensor is next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.



Sunlight Sensor/TemperatureSensor

132

TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE SSEENNSSOORRSSUUNNLLIIGGHHTT SSEENNSSOORR

Your Honda’s audio system providesclear reception on both AM and FMbands, while the preset buttons allowyou to easily select your favoritestations.

For LX and LX-V6 models

Audio System


AM/FM/CD Audio System

133

－

－

Adjust the volume by turning thePWR/VOL knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station is broadcast-ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction onAM is not available.

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pushing the PWR/VOL knob or the AM/FM button.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTOSELECT, and the Preset buttons.

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the TUNE knob to the right totune to a higher frequency, or to theleft to tune to a lower frequency.Turn the knob right or left until thedisplay reaches the desiredfrequency.

The SEEK functionsearches the band for a station witha strong signal. To activate it, pressthe SEEK bar on either the or

side, then release it.Depending on which side you press,the system scans upward or down-ward from the current frequency. Itstops when it finds a station with astrong signal.

Audio System


Operating the Radio

TUNE

SEEK

134

－

CONTINUED

The SCAN functionsamples all the stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. When the system isin the SCAN mode, SCAN shows inthe display. The system will scan upthe band for a station with a strongsignal. When it finds one, it will stopand play that station forapproximately five seconds. If you donothing, the system will then scanfor the next strong station and playthat for five seconds. When it plays astation that you want to continuelistening to, press the SCAN buttonagain.

Audio System


SCAN

135

SSTTEERREEOO IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSCCAANNIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSCCAANN BBUUTTTTOONNAAMM//FFMMBBUUTTTTOONN

SSEEEEKK BBAARR

PPWWRR//VVOOLLKKNNOOBB

PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB

－

Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a totalof six stations on AM and twelveon FM.

Pick the Preset button you wantfor that station. Press the buttonand hold it until you hear a beep.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each Presetbutton.

To store a frequency:

You can store thefrequencies of your favorite radiostations in the six preset buttons.Each button will store one frequencyon the AM band, and twofrequencies on the FM band.

Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCANfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Preset

Audio System


PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBBSSEEEEKKBBAARR


AAMM//FFMMBBUUTTTTOONN

AAUUTTOO SSEELLEECCTTIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSCCAANN BBUUTTTTOONN

AA.. SSEELL BBUUTTTTOONN

－ If you do not like the stations AutoSelect has stored, you can storeother frequencies in the presetbuttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, orSCAN function to find the desiredfrequencies, then store them in theselected preset buttons as describedpreviously.

Auto Select does not erase thefrequencies that you preset pre-viously. When you return home, turnoff Auto Select by pressing theA. SEL button. The preset buttonswill then select the frequencies youoriginally set.

If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive the stations youpreset, you can use the Auto Selectfeature to find stations in the localarea.

To activate Auto Select, press theA. SEL button. A. SEL will flash inthe display, and the system will gointo scan mode for several seconds.It automatically scans both bands,looking for stations with strongsignals. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM stations and twelve FMstations in the preset buttons. Youcan then use the preset buttons toselect those stations.

If you are in a remote area, AutoSelect may not find six strong AMstations or twelve strong FM stations.If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’displayed when you press any presetbutton that does not have a stationstored.

Once a station’s frequency is stored,simply press and release the properpreset button to tune to it.

The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour car’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

Audio System


AUTO SELECT

137

－

Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader areeach adjustable. You select which ofthese you want to adjust by pressingthe TUNE knob. The mode changesfrom BAS to TRE to FAD to BAL,and then back to the selected audiomode, each time you press theTUNE knob. Each mode is shown inthe display as it changes.

Use these modes toadjust the tone to your liking. SelectTRE or BAS by pressing the TUNEknob. Adjust the desired mode byturning the TUNE knob.The displayed number shows youthe current setting.When the adjustment level reachesthe center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.

Adjusting the Sound

Treble/Bass

Audio System


TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB

AAddjjuussttmmeenntt LLeevveell

－ These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,while FAD adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

Select BAL or FAD by pressing theTUNE knob. Adjust the Balance orFader to your liking by turning theTUNE knob.The displayed number shows youthe current setting.When the adjustment level reachesthe center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.

The system will automatically returnthe display to the selected audiomode about five seconds after youstop adjusting a mode with theTUNE knob.

For information, See page . You can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is turned off.

154

69

Audio System


Balance/Fader Radio Frequencies and Reception Audio System Lighting

139

You operate the CD player with thesame controls used for the radio.

With the ignition switch inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II), insertthe disc into the CD slot. Push thedisc in halfway, the drive will pull itin the rest of the way and begin toplay. The number of the track that isplaying is shown in the display.

You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discswithout using an adapter ring. Playonly standard round discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the drive orcause other problems.

Do not play discs with discaccessories such as protective sealsor rubbers. Using them may alsocause the audio system tomalfunction.

Operating the CD Player

Audio System


AA.. SSEELL//RRDDMMBBUUTTTTOONN

CCDD SSLLOOTTCCDD//TTAAPPEEBBUUTTTTOONN

AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN RREEPPEEAATTIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

RRAANNDDOOMMIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

EEJJEECCTT BBUUTTTTOONN

RRPPTT BBUUTTTTOONN


SSEEEEKK//SSKKIIPPBBAARR

－

－

You can use the SEEK/SKIP barwhile a disc is playing to selectpassages and change tracks.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the SEEK/SKIP bar. Pressthe side to move forward. Youwill see CUE in the display. Press the

side to move backward. Youwill see REW displayed. Release thebar when the system reaches thepoint you want.

Each time you press and release theside of the SEEK/SKIP bar,

the system skips forward to thebeginning of the next track. Pressand release the side to skipbackward to the beginning of thecurrent track. Press it again to skipto the beginning of the previoustrack.

To activate the Repeatfeature, press and release the RPTbutton. You will see RPT in thedisplay. The system continuouslyreplays the current track. Press theRPT button again to turn it off.

This feature,when activated, plays the tracks onthe CD in random order, rather thanin the order they are recorded on theCD. To activate Random Play, pressand release the A. SEL/RDM button.You will see RDM in the display. Thesystem will then select and playtracks randomly. This continuesuntil you deactivate Random Play bypressing A. SEL/RDM again.

When the system reaches the end ofthe disc, it will return to the begin-ning and play that disc again.

You can switch to the radio while aCD is playing by pressing the AM/FM button. Press the CD button toreturn to playing the CD. The CDwill begin playing where it left off.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignition,the disc will stay in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, the CDwill begin playing where it left off.

Press the eject button to remove thedisc from the drive.

If you eject the disc, but do notremove it from the slot, the systemwill automatically reload the discafter 15 seconds and put the CDplayer in pause mode. To beginplaying the disc, press the CD button.

Audio System


REPEAT

RANDOM PLAY

141

－＋

Load the desired CDs in themagazine and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.Play only standard round discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the drive orcause other problems.

A Compact Disc changer is availablefor your car. It holds up to six discs,providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate this CD changer with thesame controls used for the in-dashCD player.


If you eject the in-dash CD while it isplaying, the system will automaticallyswitch to the CD changer and beginplay where it left off. If there are noCDs in the changer, the display willflash. You will have to select anothermode (AM or FM) with the button.

When you switch back to CD mode,the system selects the same unit (in-dash or changer) that was playingwhen you switched out of CD mode.

To use the SKIP, REPEAT, andRANDOM functions, refer to the in-dash player operating instructions.

For information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page

.

If you load a CD in the in-dash playerwhile the changer is playing a CD,the system will stop the changer andbegin playing the in-dash CD. Toselect the changer again, press theCD button. Play will begin where itleft off. Use the CD button to switchbetween the player and the changer.

To select a different disc, use thePreset 5 (DISC ) or Preset 6(DISC ) button. Press the Preset 5button to select the next disc in themagazine. Press the Preset 6 buttonto select the previous disc. If youselect an empty slot in the magazine,the changer will, after finding thatslot empty, try to load the CD in thenext slot. This continues until it findsa CD to load and play.

To select the CD changer, press theCD button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed.

168

Operating the CD Changer(Optional)

Protecting Compact Discs

Audio System


If you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDplayer, find the cause in the chart tothe right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the car to yourHonda dealer.

Indication Cause Solution

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

High temperature

Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CDplayer.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation.If the CD cannot be pulled out or the errorindication does not disappear after the disc isejected, see your Honda dealer.Do not try to force the disc out of the player.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

Audio System


CD Player Error Indications

143

If you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDchanger, find the cause in the chartto the right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the car to yourHonda dealer.

Indication Cause Solution

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

High temperature

Press the magazine eject button and pull outthe magazine, check for error indication. Insertthe magazine again. If the code does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,consult your Honda dealer.Insert CD.

Press the magazine eject button and pull outthe magazine, check for error indication. Insertthe magazine again. If the code does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,consult your Honda dealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Insert CD magazine.

Audio System


CD Changer Error Indications

144

＊

＊

CONTINUED

The cassette system features DolbyB noise reduction, automaticsensing of chromium-dioxide (CrO )tape, and autoreverse for continuousplay.

To operate the cassette player, theignition switch must be inACCESSORY(I) or ON(II). Makesure the tape opening on the cassetteis facing to the right, then insert thecassette most of the way into the slot.The system will pull it in the rest ofthe way, and begin to play.

2

Dolby noise reduction manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

Audio System


Operating the Cassette Player(Optional)

145

SSEEEEKK//SSKKIIPP BBAARR

AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN

RREEPPEEAATTBBUUTTTTOONN

RREEPPEEAATTIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

TTAAPPEE DDIIRREECCTTIIOONN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

PPLLAAYY//PPRROOGGBBUUTTTTOONN

FFFF BBUUTTTTOONNRREEWW BBUUTTTTOONN

NNRR BBUUTTTTOONN


CCDD//TTAAPPEEBBUUTTTTOONN

－

▲

If you turn the system off while atape is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or by turning off theignition, the cassette will remain inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the cassette player will be inpause mode. To begin playing, pressthe PLAY/PROG button.

Fast Forward and Re-wind move the tape rapidly. To re-wind the tape, push the REW button.You will see REW in the display. Tofast forward the tape, push the FFbutton. You will see FF displayed.Press the FF, REW or PLAY/PROGbutton to take the system out of re-wind or fast forward. When the sys-tem reaches the end of the tape, itreverses direction and begins to play.

With a cassette playing, you can usethe FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEATfunction to find a desired program.

To switch to the radio or CD playerwhile a tape is playing, press theAM/FM, or CD button. To changeback to the cassette player, push theTAPE button.

The tape direction indicator will lightto show you which side of thecassette is playing. The indicatesthe side you inserted facing upwardis now playing. If you want to playthe other side, press the PLAY/PROG button.

Dolby B noise reduction turns onwhen you insert a cassette. The

indicator will light in the dis-play. If the tape was not recordedwith Dolby B noise reduction, turn itoff by pressing the NR button.

Dolby remains off until you turn it onby pressing the button again.

When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side. Ifyou want to remove the cassettefrom the drive, press the EJECTbutton on the cassette player.

Audio System


FF/REW

Tape Search Functions

146

－－ The SKIP and REPEAT functionsuse silent periods on the tape to findthe end of a song or passage. Thesefeatures may not work to yoursatisfaction if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel between selections, or a silentperiod in the middle of a selection.

The Repeat functioncontinuously replays the currentsong or passage. Press the RPTbutton to activate it; you will see RPTdisplayed as a reminder. When thesystem reaches the end of the songor passage currently playing, it willautomatically go into rewind. Whenit senses the beginning of the samesong or passage, the system returnsto PLAY mode. It will continue torepeat this same program until youdeactivate REPEAT by pressing thebutton again.

The Skip function allowsyou to find the beginning of a songor passage. To activate SKIP, pressthe SEEK/SKIP bar. Press the

side to advance to thebeginning of the next song orpassage, or the side to return tothe beginning of the current song orpassage. FF or REW will flash in thedisplay as the tape moves. When thesystem reaches the beginning of thenext song or passage (FF), or thebeginning of the current one (REW),it goes back to PLAY mode.

Damaged cassettes can jam insidethe drive or cause other problems.See page for information oncassette care and protection.

160

Audio System


REPEATSKIP

Caring for Cassettes

147

＊

＊

Your Honda’s audio system providesclear reception on both AM and FMbands, while the preset buttons allowyou to easily select your favoritestations.

The cassette system features DolbyB noise reduction, automaticsensing of chromium-dioxide (CrO )tape, and autoreverse for continuousplay.

The in-dash CD changer holds up tosix discs. You operate the CDchanger with the same controls usedfor the radio. See page for CDchanger operation.

161

2

Dolby noise reduction manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

For EX and EX-V6 models

AM/FM/Cassette/CD ChangerAudio System

Audio System


TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB

FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN

SSEEEEKKBBUUTTTTOONNSS

SSTTEERREEOOIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB AAMM BBUUTTTTOONN

SSCCAANN BBUUTTTTOONN PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS

－

－

○ ○－＋

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pressing the PWR/VOL knob or the AM or FM button.Adjust the volume by turning theknob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM orFM button. On the FM band, ST willbe displayed if the station is broad-casting in stereo. Stereoreproduction on AM is not available.

The anti-theft feature will disable thesystem if it is disconnected from thecar’s battery. To get the systemworking again, you must enter acode number (see page ).

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTOSELECT, and the Preset buttons.

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the TUNE knob to the right totune to a higher frequency, or to theleft to tune to a lower frequency.Turn the knob right or left until thedisplay reaches the desiredfrequency.

The SEEK functionsearches the band for a station witha strong signal. To activate it, presseither SEEK button ( or ), thenrelease it. Depending on whichSEEK button you press, the systemscans upward or downward from thecurrent frequency. It stops when itfinds a station with a strong signal.

171

CONTINUED

Operating the Radio

TUNE

SEEK

Audio System


－－The SCAN functionsamples all the stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. When the system isin the SCAN mode, SCAN shows inthe display. The system will scan upthe band for a station with a strongsignal. When it finds one, it will stopand play that station forapproximately five seconds. If you donothing, the system will then scanfor the next strong station and playthat for five seconds. When it plays astation that you want to continuelistening to, press the SCAN buttonagain.

You can store thefrequencies of your favorite radiostations in the six preset buttons.Each button will store one frequencyon the AM band, and twofrequencies on the FM band.

To store a frequency:Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each Presetbutton.

Pick the Preset button you wantfor that station. Press the buttonand hold it until you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a totalof six stations on AM and twelveon FM.

Once a station’s frequency is stored,simply press and release the properpreset button to tune to it.

The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour car’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCANfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

1.

2.

3.

4.

SCAN Preset

Audio System


－ If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive the stations youpreset, you can use the Auto Selectfeature to find stations in the localarea.

To activate Auto Select, press theA. SEL button. A. SEL will flash inthe display, and the system will gointo scan mode for several seconds.It automatically scans both bands,looking for stations with strongsignals. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM stations and twelve FMstations in the preset buttons. Youcan then use the preset buttons toselect those stations.

If you are in a remote area, AutoSelect may not find six strong AMstations or twelve strong FM stations.If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’displayed when you press any presetbutton that does not have a stationstored. CONTINUED

Audio System


AUTO SELECT

151

TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB


PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB

AA.. SSEELLBBUUTTTTOONN

AA.. SSEELLIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

AAMM BBUUTTTTOONN

PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSSSSCCAANN BBUUTTTTOONN

FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN

If you do not like the stations AutoSelect has stored, you can storeother frequencies in the presetbuttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, orSCAN function to find the desiredfrequencies, then store them in theselected preset buttons as describedpreviously.

Auto Select does not erase thefrequencies that you preset pre-viously. When you return home, turnoff Auto Select by pressing theA. SEL button. The preset buttonswill then select the frequencies youoriginally set.

Audio System


TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB



AA.. SSEELLBBUUTTTTOONN

AA.. SSEELLIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

AAMM BBUUTTTTOONN

PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS

FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN

SSCCAANN BBUUTTTTOONN

－

－

Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader areeach adjustable. You select which ofthese you want to adjust by pressingthe TUNE knob. The mode changesfrom BAS to TRE to FAD to BAL,and then back to the selected audiomode, each time you press theTUNE knob.

The system will automatically returnthe display to the selected audiomode about five seconds after youstop adjusting a mode with theTUNE knob.

Use these modes toadjust the tone to your liking. SelectTRE or BAS by pressing the TUNEknob. Adjust the desired mode byturning the TUNE knob.The displayed number shows youthe current setting.When the adjustment level reachesthe center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,while FAD adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

Select BAL or FAD by pressing theTUNE knob. Adjust the Balance orFader to your liking by turning theTUNE knob.The displayed number shows youthe current setting.When the adjustment level reachesthe center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.

Audio System


Adjusting the Sound

Treble/Bass

Balance/Fader

153

TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBBAAddjjuussttmmeenntt LLeevveell

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is turned off.

Your Honda’s radio can receive thecomplete AM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band:530 to 1,710 kilohertzFM band:87.7 to 107.9 megahertz

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least tenkilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).Stations on the FM band areassigned frequencies at least 0.2megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

How well your Honda’s radioreceives stations is dependent onmany factors, such as the distancefrom the station’s transmitter,nearby large objects, and atmos-pheric conditions.

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator will

go off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

69

Audio System Lighting

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

Audio System


Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

Audio System


▲

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).Make sure the tape opening on thecassette is facing to the right, theninsert the cassette most of the wayinto the slot. The system will pull itin the rest of the way, and begin toplay.

The tape direction indicator will lightto show you which side of thecassette is playing. The indicatesthe side you inserted facing upwardis now playing. If you want to playthe other side, press the PROGbutton.

Dolby noise reduction turns on whenyou insert a cassette. If the tape wasnot recorded with Dolby noise reduc-tion, turn it off by pressing the

button.

Dolby remains off until you turn it onby pressing the button again.

When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side. Ifyou want to remove the cassettefrom the drive, press the EJECTbutton.

You can remove the cassette withthe ignition switch in any position,even if the audio system is turned off.

If you turn the system off while atape is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or by turning off theignition, the cassette will remain inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the tape will begin playingwhere it left off.

To switch to the radio or CDchanger while listening to a tape,press the AM, FM or CD button. Tochange back to the cassette player,press the TAPE button.

Operating the Cassette Player

Audio System


－

CONTINUED

With a cassette playing, you can usethe FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEATfunction to find a desired program.

Fast Forward andRewind move the tape rapidly. Torewind the tape, push the REWbutton. You will see REW in thedisplay. To fast forward the tape,push the FF button. You will see FFdisplayed. Press the FF, REW orPLAY button to take the system outof rewind or fast forward. When thesystem reaches the end of the tape,it reverses direction and begins toplay.

Tape Search Functions

FF/REW

Audio System


DDOOLLBBYY IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

AAMM BBUUTTTTOONN

PPLLAAYYBBUUTTTTOONN DDOOLLBBYY BBUUTTTTOONN

CCDD BBUUTTTTOONN

FFFF BBUUTTTTOONN

TTAAPPEEBBUUTTTTOONN


PPRROOGG BBUUTTTTOONN

FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN

RREEWWBBUUTTTTOONN

TTAAPPEE DDIIRREECCTTIIOONN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

CCAASSSSEETTTTEE SSLLOOTT

TTAAPPEE EEJJEECCTTBBUUTTTTOONN

－

○

○

○ ○

－

＋

－＋

The SKIP function allowsyou to find the beginning of a songor passage. To skip to the beginningof a song or passage currentlyplaying, push the button. You willsee REW flashing in the display asthe tape rewinds. To skip to thebeginning of the next song, push the

button. You will see FF flashing inthe display as the tape fast forwards.When the system finds the begin-ning of a song or passage, it goesback to PLAY.

To stop the SKIP function before itfinds the beginning of a song orpassage, press either of the SKIPbuttons ( or ).

Audio System


SKIP

158

RREEPPEEAATT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSKKIIPP BBUUTTTTOONNSS

FFFF BBUUTTTTOONN

RREEWW BBUUTTTTOONN

RRPPTT BBUUTTTTOONN

－ The Repeat functioncontinuously replays the currentsong or passage. Press the RPTbutton to activate it; you will see RPTdisplayed as a reminder. When thesystem reaches the end of the songor passage currently playing, it willautomatically go into rewind. Whenit senses the beginning of the samesong or passage, the system returnsto PLAY mode. It will continue torepeat this same program until youdeactivate REPEAT by pressing thebutton again.Pressing the REW or FF button, oreither of the SKIP buttons, also turnsoff REPEAT.

The SKIP and REPEAT functionsuse silent periods on the tape to findthe end of a song or passage. Thesefeatures may not work to yoursatisfaction if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel between selections, or a silentperiod in the middle of a selection.

Audio System


REPEAT

159

The cassette player picks up dirt andoxides from the tape. This contami-nation builds up over time andcauses the sound quality to degrade.To prevent this, you should clean theplayer after every 30 hours of use.Your dealer has a cleaning kitavailable.

If you do not clean the cassetteplayer regularly, it may eventuallybecome impossible to remove thecontamination with a normalcleaning kit.

Use 100-minute or shorter cassettes.Cassettes longer than that usethinner tape that may break or jamthe drive.

Look at the cassette before youinsert it. If the tape is loose, tightenit by turning a hub with a pencil oryour finger.If the label is peeling off, remove itfrom the cassette or it could causethe cassette to jam in the player.Never try to insert a warped ordamaged cassette in the player.

When they are not in use, storecassettes in their cases to protectthem from dust and moisture. Neverplace cassettes where they will beexposed to direct sunlight, high heat,or high humidity. If a cassette isexposed to extreme heat or cold, letit reach a moderate temperaturebefore inserting it in the player.

Never try to insert foreign objectsinto the cassette player.

If you see the error indication‘‘ ’’ on the display, pressthe TAPE EJECT button to removethe cassette from the unit. Makesure the tape is not damaged. If thecassette will not eject or the errorindication stays on after the cassetteejects, take the car to your Hondadealer.

Caring for the Cassette Player

Audio System


CONTINUED

To load the CDs or operate the CDchanger, the ignition switch must bein ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).

Load and play only standard rounddiscs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam inthe drive or cause other problems.You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

Your Honda’s audio system has anin-dash CD changer that holds up tosix discs, providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate this CD changer with thesame controls used for the radio andcassette player.


Audio System


Operating the CD Changer

161

SSKKIIPP BBUUTTTTOONNSS

RREEPPEEAATT BBUUTTTTOONN

LLOOAADD BBUUTTTTOONN


CCDD EEJJEECCTTBBUUTTTTOONN

CCDD SSLLOOTT

RRDDMM BBUUTTTTOONN CCDD BBUUTTTTOONN

To load multiple CDs in oneoperation:

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. The system will thenbegin playing the last CD loaded.

If you are not loading CDs into all sixpositions, press the Load buttonagain after the last CD has loaded.The system will begin playing thelast CD loaded.

If you stop loading CDs before all sixpositions are filled, and you do notpress the Load button, the systemwill wait for ten seconds, then stopthe load operation and begin playingthe last CD loaded.

To load a single CD:

Press and release the Load button.

Press and hold the Load buttonuntil you hear a beep and see‘‘LOAd’’ in the display, thenrelease the button.

On the upper left side of thedisplay, the disc number for anempty position will begin blinkingand the green CD Loadedindicator will come on.

When the disc number for anempty position starts to blink andthe green CD Loaded indicatorcomes on, you will see LOAd inthe display, then insert the discinto the CD slot. Insert it onlyabout halfway, the drive will pull itin the rest of the way.

When LOAd appears again in thedisplay, insert the next disc intothe CD slot.

Insert the disc into the CD slot.Insert it only about halfway, thedrive will pull it in the rest of theway. You will see BUSY in thedisplay. The CD loaded indicatorturns red and blinks as the CD isloaded.

The system will load the CD, andbegin playing it.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.

3.

Audio System


Loading CDs in the Changer

162

CONTINUED

If you press the Load button while aCD is playing, the system will stopplaying that CD and start the loadingsequence. It will then play the CDjust loaded.

You can also load a CD into an emptyposition while a CD is playing bypressing the appropriate presetbutton. Select an empty position (thedisc number indicator is off), andpress the preset button for thatposition (1 to 6). The system willstop playing the current CD and startthe loading sequence. It will thenplay the CD just loaded.

Audio System


LLOOAADD BBUUTTTTOONN

CCDD SSLLOOTT


DDIISSCC NNUUMMBBEERR

CCDD LLOOAADDEEDD IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

TTAAPPEE BBUUTTTTOONN

FFMMBBUUTTTTOONN

AAMMBBUUTTTTOONN

－

－

－

○○

○

○

＋－

＋

－

Select the CD changer by pressingthe CD button. You will see ‘‘Cd’’ inthe display. The system will beginplaying the last selected disc in theCD changer. You will see the discand track numbers displayed.

When that disc ends, the next disc inthe CD changer is loaded and played.After the last disc finishes, thesystem returns to disc 1.

To select a different disc, press theappropriate Preset button (1 6). Ifyou select an empty position in theCD changer, the system will go intothe loading sequence (see page ).

You can use the SKIP buttons whilea disc is playing to select passagesand change tracks.

To activate the Repeatfeature, press and release the RPTbutton. You will see RPT in thedisplay as a reminder. The systemcontinuously replays the currenttrack. Press the RPT button again toturn it off. Pressing either of theSKIP buttons also turns off therepeat feature.

This feature,when activated, plays the trackswithin a CD in random order, ratherthan in the order they are recordedon the CD. To activate Random Play,press the RDM button. You will seeRDM in the display. The system willthen select and play tracks randomly.This continues until you deactivateRandom Play by pressing the RDMbutton again, or you select adifferent CD with a preset button.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the appropriate SKIPbutton. You will hear a beep and thesystem will continue to move. Pressthe button to move forward, orthe button to move backward.Release the button when the systemreaches the point you want.

Each time you press the buttonand release it, the system skipsforward to the beginning of the nexttrack. Press and release thebutton to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track. Pressand release it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous track.

162

Audio System


Operation REPEAT

RANDOM PLAY

164

To take the system out of CD mode,press the AM or FM button, or inserta cassette in the player. If a tape isalready in the cassette player, pressthe TAPE button. When you returnto CD mode by pressing the CDbutton, play will continue at the samepoint that it left off.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or the ignition switch, play willcontinue at the same point when youturn it back on.

CONTINUED

Audio System




RRDDMMBBUUTTTTOONN

SSKKIIPPBBUUTTTTOONNSS

CCDDBBUUTTTTOONN

RRPPTT BBUUTTTTOONN

FFMMBBUUTTTTOONN

AAMMBBUUTTTTOONN

TTAAPPEE BBUUTTTTOONN

RRPPTT IINNDDIICCAATTOORRRRDDMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

To remove the disc that is currentlyplaying, press the Eject button. Youwill see ‘‘EJEC’’ in the display. Whenyou remove the disc from the slot,the system automatically begins theLoad sequence so you can loadanother CD in that position. If you donot load another CD, after tenseconds the system begins playingthe next disc in the changer. If thechanger is empty, the system selectsthe previous mode (AM, FM, orTape).

If you do not remove the disc fromthe slot, the system will reload thedisc after 15 seconds and put the CDchanger in pause mode. To beginplaying the disc, press the CD button.

To remove a different CD from thechanger, first select it with theappropriate preset button. When thatCD begins playing, press the Ejectbutton.

Removing CDs from the Changer


Audio System

166

CCDD SSLLOOTT CCDD EEJJEECCTT BBUUTTTTOONN

CCDD BBUUTTTTOONN

If you press the Eject button whilelistening to the radio or tape, or withthe audio system turned off, the discthat was last selected is ejected.After that disc is ejected, pressingthe Eject button again will eject thenext disc in the numerical order. Bydoing this six times, you can removeall the CDs from the changer.

In any mode, if you press the Ejectbutton and hold it until you hear abeep, the system will eject all of thediscs in the changer.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is off. The disc thatwas last selected is ejected first. Youcan eject up to five discs, one at atime.

Audio System


Handle a CD by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Contaminationfrom fingerprints, liquids, felt-tippens, and labels can cause the CD tonot play properly, or possibly jam inthe drive.

When a CD is not being played, storeit in its case to protect it from dustand other contamination. To preventwarpage, keep CDs out of directsunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the disc from the centerto the outside edge.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe CD player or the magazine.

A new CD may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on the re-cording surface of the disc, causingskipping or other problems. Removethese pieces by rubbing the innerand outer edges with the side of apencil or pen.

Protecting Compact Discs

Audio System


If you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDchanger, find the cause in the chartto the right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the car to yourHonda dealer.

Indication SolutionCause

Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs,check for error indication. Insert the CDs again.If the code does not disappear or the CD cannotbe pulled out, consult your Honda dealer.Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs,check for error indication. Insert the CDs again.If the code does not disappear or the CD cannotbe pulled out, consult your Honda dealer.Insert CD.

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

No CD in the CDchanger.

CD Changer Error Indications

Audio System


▲ ▼The top and bottom buttons adjustthe volume up ( ) or down ( ).Press the proper button and hold ituntil the desired volume is reached,then release it.

Two controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

The AUDIO/CH button has threefunctions, depending on whether youare listening to the radio, or playing acassette or CD.

If you are listening to the radio, usethe AUDIO/CH button to changestations. Each time you press thisbutton, the system advances to thenext preset station on the band youare listening to. You will see thenumber of the selected Preset buttonin the display. To change bands,press the AM or FM button on theaudio system’s front panel.

If you are playing a cassette, use theAUDIO/CH button to advance to thenext selection. You will see ‘‘FF’’blinking in the display when youpress the AUDIO/CH button. Thesystem fast forwards until it senses asilent period, then goes back toPLAY.

If you are playing a CD, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack each time you push theAUDIO/CH button. You will see thedisc and track number in the display.


Remote Audio Controls

Audio System


AAUUDDIIOO//CCHHBBUUTTTTOONN

Your car’s audio system will disableitself if it is disconnected fromelectrical power for any reason. Tomake it work again, the user mustenter a specific five-digit code in thePreset buttons. Because there arehundreds of number combinationspossible from five digits, making thesystem work without knowing theexact code is nearly impossible.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system’s codenumber and serial number. It is bestto store this card in a safe place athome. In addition, you should writethe audio system’s serial number inthis Owner’s Manual. If you shouldhappen to lose the card, you mustobtain the code number from yourHonda dealer. To do this, you willneed the system’s serial number.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over or try tocorrect your mistake. Complete thefive-digit sequence, then enter thecorrect code. You have ten tries toenter the correct code. If you areunsuccessful in ten attempts, youmust then leave the system on forone hour before trying again.

If your car’s battery is disconnectedor goes dead, or the radio fuse isremoved, the audio system willdisable itself. If this happens, youwill see ‘‘ ’’ in the frequencydisplay the next time you turn on thesystem. Use the Preset buttons toenter the five-digit code. If it isentered correctly, the radio will startplaying.

You will have to store your favoritestations in the Preset buttons afterthe system begins working. Youroriginal settings were lost whenpower was disconnected.

When the audio system disableditself, you can see the eight-digitaudio system serial number on thedisplay. To display the serialnumber:

Turn the ignition switchACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).

After you have entered the audiosystem’s code number correctly, theserial number will not be displayed.

You will see the first 4-digitnumber on the display for fiveseconds, then the next 4-digitnumber is shown for five seconds.You will see 8-digit serial numberin total. This procedure is repeatedonce again.

Push the PWR/VOL knob to turnon the audio system whilepressing the Preset 1 and 6buttons at the same time.

1.

2.

3.

On EX and EX-V6 modelsTheft Protection Displaying Audio System’s Serial

Number

Audio System


Once the security system is set,opening either door (without usingthe key or the remote transmitter),or the hood, will cause it to alarm. Italso alarms if the radio is removedfrom the dashboard or the wiring iscut.

The security system helps to protectyour car and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights and taillights flashes ifsomeone attempts to break into yourcar or remove the radio. This alarmcontinues for two minutes, then thesystem resets. To reset an alarmingsystem before the two minutes haveelapsed, unlock either door with thekey or the remote transmitter.

The security system sets auto-matically fifteen seconds after youlock the doors, hood, and trunk. Forthe system to activate, you must lockthe doors from the outside with thekey, lock tab, door lock switch, orremote transmitter. The securitysystem light next to the driver’s doorlock starts blinking immediately toshow you the system is setting itself.

With the system set, you can stillopen the trunk with the master keyor the remote transmitter (if thetransmitter is equipped with a trunkopener) without triggering the alarm.The alarm will sound if the trunklock is forced, or the trunk is openedwith the trunk release handle or theemergency trunk opener.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, trunk, or either door is notfully closed. If the system will not set,check the Door and Brake LampMonitor on the instrument panel(see page ), to see if the doorsand trunk are fully closed. Since it isnot part of the monitor display,manually check the hood.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

61

Standard on EX and EX-V6 modelsOptional on LX and LX-V6 models

Security System


SSEECCUURRIITTYY SSYYSSTTEEMM LLIIGGHHTT

Before you begin driving your Honda,you should know what gasoline touse, and how to check the levels ofimportant fluids. You also need toknow how to properly store luggageor packages. The information in thissection will help you. If you plan toadd any accessories to your car,please read the information in thissection first.

.............................Break-in Period . 174.........................................Gasoline . 174

.........Service Station Procedures . 175................Filling the Fuel Tank . 175

....................Opening the Hood . 176...............................Oil Check . 178

.........Engine Coolant Check . 180...............................Fuel Economy . 181

.....................Vehicle Condition . 181...........................Driving Habits . 181

...Accessories and Modifications . 182.............................Carrying Cargo . 184

Before Driving

Before Driving 173

During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

We recommend gasolines containingdetergent additives that help preventfuel system and engine deposits.

Avoid hard braking. New brakesneed to be broken-in by moderateuse for the first 200 miles (300km).

Your Honda is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 86 or higher. Useof a lower octane gasoline can causea persistent, heavy metallic rappingnoise in the engine that can lead tomechanical damage.

In Canada, some gasolines containan octane-enhancing additive calledMMT. If you use such gasolines,your emission control systemperformance may deteriorate andthe Malfunction Indicator Lamp onyour instrument panel may turn on.If this happens, contact yourauthorized Honda dealer for service.

Help assure your car’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).

Using gasoline containing lead willdamage your car’s emissionscontrols. This contributes to airpollution.

You should follow these same re-commendations with an overhauledor exchanged engine, or when thebrakes are relined.

Do not change the oil until therecommended time or mileageinterval shown in the maintenanceschedule.

Before Driving

Break-in Period Gasoline

Break-in Period, Gasoline

174

CONTINUED

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.Place the cap in the holder on thefuel fill door.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank, leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

Open the fuel fill door by pushingon the handle to the left of thedriver’s seat.

Because the fuel fill cap is on thedriver’s side of the car, park withthat side closest to the servicestation pumps.

Your car has an on-board refuelingvapor recovery system to helpkeep fuel vapors from going intothe atmosphere. If the fuel pumpkeeps clicking off even though thetank is not full, there may be aproblem with this system. Consultyour dealer.

3.

4.

1.

2.

Service Station Procedures

Before Driving

Filling the Fuel Tank

174

FFUUEELL FFIILLLL CCAAPP

PPuusshh

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

Shift to Park or Neutral and setthe parking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Standing in front of the car, putyour fingers under the front edgeof the hood to the right of center.Slide your hand to the left untilyou feel the hood latch handle.Push this handle up until itreleases the hood. Lift the hood.

Screw the fuel fill cap back on,tighten it until it clicks severaltimes. If you do not properlytighten the cap, the MalfunctionIndicator Lamp may come on (seepage ).

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

1. 2.

5.

6.

311


Before Driving

Opening the Hood

176

HHOOOODD RREELLEEAASSEE HHAANNDDLLEE LLAATTCCHH

CONTINUED

4-cylinder modelsPull the support rod out of its clipby holding the grip and insert theend into the hole on the front ofthe hood around the center.

If you can open the hood withoutlifting the hood latch handle, or thehood latch handle moves stiffly ordoes not spring back as before, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated (see page ).

To close the hood, lift it up slightly toremove the support rod from thehole. Put the support rod back intoits holding clip. Lower the hood toabout a foot (30 cm) above thefender, then let it drop.

After closing the hood, make sure itis securely latched.

3.

251


Before Driving 177

SSUUPPPPOORRTT RROODD


GGRRIIPP

Remove the dipstick (orangehandle).

Lift the hood up most of the way.The hydraulic supports will lift itup the rest of the way and hold itup.

To close the hood, lower it to about afoot (30 cm) above the fender, thenpress down firmly with your hands.After closing the hood, make sure itis securely latched.

Check the engine oil level every timeyou fill the car with fuel. Wait a fewminutes after turning the engine offbefore you check the oil.

1.

6-cylinder models


Before Driving

Oil Check

178

DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK

66--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss66--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss 44--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss

DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK

CONTINUED

Insert it all the way back in its tube.Wipe the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

3.2.


Before Driving 179

44--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss 66--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss

Refer toon page for information

on checking other items in yourHonda.

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Remove the dipstick again andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

4.

230

235

227


Before Driving

Owner MaintenanceChecks

AddingEngine Coolant

Adding Oil

Engine Coolant Check

180

MMIINN

MMAAXX

MMIINN

MMAAXXRREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK

66--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss44--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss

UUPPPPEERR MMAARRKK

LLOOWWEERR MMAARRKK

A cold engine uses more fuel than awarm engine. It is not necessary to‘‘warm-up’’ a cold engine by letting itidle for a long time. You can driveaway in about a minute, no matterhow cold it is outside. The enginewill warm up faster, and you getbetter fuel economy. To cut down onthe number of ‘‘cold starts,’’ try tocombine several short trips into one.

You can improve fuel economy bydriving moderately. Rapid acceler-ation, abrupt cornering, and hardbraking use more fuel.

Always drive in the highest gear thatallows the engine to run and acceler-ate smoothly.

The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Turn off the A/C tocut down on air conditioning use.Use the flow-through ventilationwhen the outside air temperature ismoderate.

Depending on traffic conditions, tryto maintain a constant speed. Everytime you slow down and speed up,your car uses extra fuel. Use thecruise control, when appropriate, toincrease fuel economy.

The condition of your car and yourdriving habits are the two mostimportant things that affect the fuelmileage you get.

Always maintain your car accordingto the maintenance schedule. Thiswill keep it in top operating condition.

An important part of that mainte-nance is the

(see page ). Forexample, an underinflated tirecauses more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’which uses fuel. It also wears outfaster, so check the tire pressure atleast monthly.

In winter, the build-up of snow onyour car’s underside adds weight androlling resistance. Frequent cleaninghelps your fuel mileage and reducesthe chance of corrosion.

227

Vehicle Condition

Driving Habits

Owner MaintenanceChecks

Before Driving

Fuel Economy

181

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ).

Have the installer contact yourHonda dealer for assistance beforeinstalling any electronic accessory.

If possible, have your dealer inspectthe final installation.

Before installing any accessory:

Modifying your car, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake your car unsafe. Before youmake any modifications or add anyaccessories, be sure to read thefollowing information.

Your dealer has Genuine Hondaaccessories that allow you topersonalize your car. Theseaccessories have been designed andapproved for your car, and arecovered by warranty.

Non-Honda accessories are usuallydesigned for universal applications.Although aftermarket accessoriesmay fit on your car, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your car’shandling and stability. (See‘‘Modifications’’ on the page foradditional information.)

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your car’scomputer-controlled systems, suchas the SRS and anti-lock brakesystem.

However, if electronic accessoriesare improperly installed, or exceedyour car’s electrical system capacity,they can interfere with the operation

of your car, or even cause theairbags to deploy.

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper car operation orperformance.

183

315

Accessories

Accessories and Modifications

Before Driving182

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourcar’s handling, stability andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

In addition, any modifications thatdecrease ground clearance increasethe chance of undercarriage partsstriking a curb, speed bump, or otherraised object, which could causeyour airbags to deploy.

Do not modify your steering wheelor any other part of yourSupplemental Restraint System.Modifications could make thesystem ineffective.

Do not remove any originalequipment or modify your car in anyway that would alter its design oroperation. This could make your carunsafe and illegal to drive.

For example, do not make anymodifications that would change theride height of your car, or installwheels and tires with a differentoverall diameter.

Such modifications can adverselyaffect handling, and interfere withthe operation of the car’s anti-lockbrakes and other systems.

Covering the outside edge of afront seat-back, with a non-Hondaseat cover for example, couldprevent the airbag from inflatingproperly.Any object

attached to or placed on the coversmarked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG,’’ in thecenter of the steering wheel andon top of the dashboard, couldinterfere with the proper operationof the airbags. Or, if the airbagsinflate, the objects could bepropelled inside the car and hurtsomeone.

If a side airbaginflates, a cup holder or other hardobject attached on or near thedoor could be propelled inside thecar and hurt someone.


Modifications

Additional Safety Precautions

Accessories and Modifications

Before Driving

Do not place any objects over theoutside edge of a front seat-back.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a door.

183

The glove box, and the pockets inthe doors and seat-backs, aredesigned for small, lightweight items.The trunk is intended for larger,heavier items. In addition, the backseat can be folded down to allow youto carry more cargo or longer items.

Your car has several convenientstorage areas so you can stow cargosafely.

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour car’s handling, stability andoperation and make it unsafe. Beforecarrying any type of cargo, be sure toread the following pages.

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving184

CCOONNSSOOLLEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT

GGLLOOVVEE BBOOXXSSEEAATT--BBAACCKK PPOOCCKKEETTTTRRUUNNKK

DDOOOORR PPOOCCKKEETT

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe driver’s ability to operate thepedals, or with the properoperation of the seats.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If the lid is open, apassenger could injure their kneesduring a crash or sudden stop.

This figure includes the total weightof all occupants, cargo, accessories,and the tongue weight if you aretowing a trailer.

The final number is the total weightof cargo you can carry.

If you are towing a trailer, add thetongue weight to the numberabove.

Add up the weight of all occupants.

To figure out how much cargo youcan carry:

The maximum load for your car is850 lbs (395 kg).

Subtract the total from 850 lbs(395 kg).

Do not put any items on top of therear shelf. They can block yourview and be thrown around the carduring a crash.

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

Load Limit

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving 185

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the trunk, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible.

If you can carry any items on aroof rack, be sure the total weightof the rack and the items does notexceed the maximum allowableweight. Please contact your Hondadealer for further information.

You can use the cargo net to securesmall items in the trunk.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing the trunklid, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of carbon monoxidepoisoning, follow the instructionson page .

If you fold down the back seat, tiedown items that could be thrownabout the car during a crash orsudden stop.

52

On EX and EX-V6 modelsCarrying Cargo in the Trunk or ona Roof Rack

Cargo Net

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving186

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate the5-speed manual and automatictransmissions. It also includesimportant information on parkingyour car, the braking system, theTraction Control System, and factsyou need if you are planning to tow atrailer.

........................Preparing to Drive . 188.......................Starting the Engine . 189

Starting in Cold Weather....................at High Altitude . 190

....5-speed Manual Transmission . 191.....Recommended Shift Points . 192

..............Engine Speed Limiter . 192

..............Automatic Transmission . 192.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 193

................Shift Lever Positions . 193..............Engine Speed Limiter . 196

....................Shift Lock Release . 196...........................................Parking . 198

.....................The Braking System . 199.............Brake Wear Indicators . 199

...............Brake System Design . 200.......................Anti-lock Brakes . 200

Important Safety.........................Reminders . 201........................ABS Indicator . 201

..............Traction Control System . 202...............Driving in Bad Weather . 205

...........................Towing a Trailer . 207

Driving

Driving 187

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check that the hood and trunk arefully closed.

Check the adjustment of the seat(see page ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the adjustment of thesteering wheel (see page ).

Make sure the doors are securelyclosed and locked.

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

Turn the ignition switch ON (II).Check the indicator lights in theinstrument panel.

Start the engine (see page ).

Check the gauges and indicatorlights in the instrument panel (seepage ).

Check that any items you may becarrying with you inside are storedproperly or fastened downsecurely.

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

You should do the following checksand adjustments every day beforeyou drive your car.

3.

2.

1.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

15

10.

11.

12.

94

73

189

57

106

Preparing to Drive

Driving188

Push the clutch pedal down all theway. START (III) does notfunction unless the clutch pedal isdepressed.

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

If the engine still does not start,press the accelerator pedal all theway down and hold it there whilestarting in order to clear flooding.As before, keep the ignition key inthe START (III) position for nomore than 15 seconds. Return tostep 5 if the engine does not start.If it starts, lift your foot off theaccelerator pedal so the enginedoes not race.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. If the enginedoes not start right away, do nothold the key in START (III) formore than 15 seconds at a time.Pause for at least 10 secondsbefore trying again.

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed half-waydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Automatic Transmission:

Manual Transmission:

Starting the Engine

Driving 189

Use the following procedure:

An engine is harder to start in coldweather. The thinner air found athigh altitude above 8,000 feet (2,400meters) adds to the problem.

If the engine fails to start in step 2,push the accelerator pedal to thefloor and hold it there while youtry to start the engine for no morethan 15 seconds. If the enginedoes not start, return to step 2.

Turn off all electrical accessoriesto reduce the drain on the battery.

Push the accelerator pedal half-way to the floor and hold it therewhile starting the engine. Do nothold the ignition key in START(III) for more than 15 seconds.When the engine starts, releasethe accelerator pedal gradually asthe engine speeds up and smoothsout.

1.

2.

3.

Driving

Starting in Cold Weather at HighAltitude (Above 8,000 feet/2,400 meters)

Starting the Engine

190

Come to a full stop before you shiftinto Reverse. You can damage thetransmission by trying to shift intoReverse with the car moving. Pushdown the clutch pedal, and pause fora few seconds before shifting intoReverse, or shift into one of theforward gears for a moment. Thisstops the gears so they won’t ‘‘grind.’’

When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Before downshifting,make sure engine speed will not gointo the tachometer’s red zone in thelower gear.

The manual transmission is syn-chronized in all forward gears forsmooth operation. It has a lockout soyou cannot shift directly from Fifthto Reverse. When shifting up ordown, make sure you push the clutchpedal down all the way, shift to thenext gear, and let the pedal upgradually. When you are not shifting,do not rest your foot on the clutchpedal. This can cause your clutch towear out faster.

Driving

5-speed Manual Transmission

191

Rapid slowing or speeding-upcan cause loss of control onslippery surfaces. If you crash,you can be injured.

Use extra care when driving onslippery surfaces.

Your Honda’s transmission has fourforward speeds, and is electronicallycontrolled for smoother shifting. Italso has a ‘‘lock-up’’ torque converterfor better fuel economy. You mayfeel what seems like another shiftwhen the converter locks.

Drive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you the bestfuel economy and effective emis-sions control. The following shiftpoints are recommended:

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.

Before downshifting, make sure theengine will not go into thetachometer’s red zone.

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th

Normal acceleration

15 mph (24 km/h)28 mph (45 km/h)41 mph (66 km/h)52 mph (84 km/h)

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th

Cruise acceleration

7 mph (11 km/h)22 mph (35 km/h)33 mph (53 km/h)48 mph (77 km/h)

5-speed Manual Transmission, Automatic Transmission

Driving

Automatic TransmissionRecommended Shift Points Engine Speed Limiter

192

CONTINUED

The shift lever has seven positions.It must be in Park or Neutral to startthe engine. When you are stopped inD , D , 2, 1, N or R, press firmly onthe brake pedal, and keep your footoff the accelerator pedal.

This indicator between the fuelgauge and temperature gauge showswhich position the shift lever is in.

The ‘‘D ’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II). If it flasheswhile driving (in any shift position),it indicates a possible problem in thetransmission. Avoid rapid acceler-ation and have the transmissionchecked by an authorized Hondadealer as soon as possible.

4 3

4

Driving

Automatic Transmission

Shift Lever Position Indicator Shift Lever Positions

193

SSHHIIFFTT LLEEVVEERR

RREELLEEAASSEE BBUUTTTTOONN

－

－

To shift to Reversefrom Park, see the explanation underPark. To shift to Reverse fromNeutral, come to a complete stop andthen shift. Press the release buttonbefore shifting into Reverse fromNeutral.

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Press the releasebutton on the side of the shift leverto move it.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see Shift Lock Release on page

.

You must also press the releasebutton to shift into Park. To avoidtransmission damage, come to acomplete stop before shifting intoPark. The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you can remove the key fromthe ignition switch.

196

To shift from:P to R

R to PN to RD to 22 to 11 to 2

2 to DD to DD to ND to DN to DR to N

Do this:Press the brake pedal andpress the release button.

Press the release button.

Move the lever.

3

3

3 4

4

4 3

4

Driving


Reverse (R)

Park (P)

194

－－

－

－ To shift to Second,press the release button on the sideof the shift lever. This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gearwhen you come to a stop. Secondgives you more power when climbing,and increased engine braking whengoing down steep hills. Use secondgear when starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow. It will helpreduce wheelspin.

This position is similarto D , except only the first threegears are selected. Use D whentowing a trailer in hilly terrain, or toprovide engine braking when goingdown a steep hill. D can also keepthe transmission from cyclingbetween third and fourth gears instop-and-go driving.

For faster acceleration when in D orD , you can get the transmission toautomatically downshift by pushingthe accelerator pedal to the floor.The transmission will shift down oneor two gears, depending on yourspeed.

Use this position foryour normal driving. The transmis-sion automatically selects a suitablegear for your speed and acceleration.You may notice the transmissionshifting up at higher speeds whenthe engine is cold. This helps theengine warm up faster.

Use Neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to Park posi-tion if you need to leave the car forany reason. Press on the brake pedalwhen you are moving the shift leverfrom Neutral to another gear.

43

3

34

CONTINUED


Driving

Second (2)Drive (D )

Drive (D )

Neutral (N) 3

4

195

－ To shift from Second toFirst, press the release button on theside of the shift lever. With the leverin this position, the transmissionlocks in First gear. By upshifting anddownshifting through 1, 2, D and D ,you can operate this transmissionmuch like a manual transmissionwithout a clutch pedal.

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.

This allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal and pressing the releasebutton does not work.

Set the Parking brake.

Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

1.

2.

3 4


Driving

First (1) Engine Speed Limiter Shift Lock Release

196

Put a cloth on the edge of the ShiftLock Release slot cover next tothe shift lever.Use a small flat-tipped screwdriveror small metal plate (neither areincluded in the tool kit) to removethe cover. Carefully pry off theedge of the cover.

Insert the key in the Shift LockRelease slot.

Push down on the key while youpress the release button on theshift lever and move the shift leverout of Park to Neutral.

Remove the key from the ShiftLock Release slot, then reinstallthe cover. Make sure the notch onthe cover is on the left side.Depress the brake pedal andrestart the engine.

If you need to use the Shift LockRelease, it means your car isdeveloping a problem. Have the carchecked by your Honda dealer.

4.

5.

6.

3.


Driving 197

－

Make sure the moonroof and thewindows are closed.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the trunk or take them with you.

Turn off the lights.

Make sure the parking brake is fullyreleased before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat or damagethe rear brakes.

Lock the doors.

Lock the doors with the key or theremote transmitter. Check theindicator on the driver’s door toverify that the security system isset.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The three way catalyticconverter gets very hot, and couldcause these materials to catch onfire.

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your car. The indicator onthe instrument panel shows that theparking brake is not fully released; itdoes not indicate that the parkingbrake is firmly set. Make sure theparking brake is set firmly or yourcar may roll if it is parked on anincline.

If your car has an automatictransmission, set the parking brakebefore you put the transmission inPark. This keeps the car frommoving and putting pressure on theparking mechanism in thetransmission making it easier tomove the shift lever out of Parkwhen you want to drive away.

If the car is facing uphill, turn thefront wheels away from the curb. Ifyou have a manual transmission, putit in first gear.

If the car is facing downhill, turn thefront wheels toward the curb. If youhave a manual transmission, put it inreverse gear.


Parking Tips

Driving

Parking

198

Your brakes may sometimes squealor squeak when you apply themlightly. Do not confuse this with thebrake wear indicators. They make avery audible ‘‘screeching.’’

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by downshifting to a lowergear and taking your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

Check your brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Since alonger distance is needed to stopwith wet brakes, be extra cautiousand alert in your driving.

The front disc brakes on all modelshave audible brake wear indicators.They are also on the rear brakes ofcars equipped with ABS as standardequipment.When the brake pads need replacing,you will hear a distinctive metallic‘‘screeching’’ sound when you applythe brakes. If you do not have thebrake pads replaced, they will beginscreeching all the time.

Your Honda is equipped with frontdisc brakes. The brakes on the rearwheels may be disc or drum,depending on the model. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The ABS (oncars equipped with ABS) helps youretain steering control when brakingvery hard.

Put your foot on the brake pedal onlywhen you intend to brake. Restingyour foot on the pedal keeps thebrakes applied lightly, causing themto build up heat. Heat build-up canreduce how well your brakes work. Italso keeps your brake lights on allthe time, confusing drivers behindyou.

Brake Wear Indicators

The Braking System

Driving 199

this defeats thepurpose of the ABS. Let the ABSwork for you by always keeping firm,steady pressure on the brake pedalas you steer away from the hazard.This is sometimes referred to as

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal, it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes.

Activation varies with the amount oftraction your tires have. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before youactivate the ABS. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

ABS helps to prevent the wheelsfrom locking up and skidding duringhard braking, allowing you to retainsteering control.

When the front tires skid, you losesteering control; the car continuesstraight ahead even though you turnthe steering wheel. The ABS helps toprevent lock-up and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly; much faster than aperson can do it.

The EX, LX-V6 and EX-V6 modelshave an Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) as standard equipment.

‘‘stomp and steer.’’

Anti-lock Brakes You should never pump thebrake pedal,

Brake System Design

The Braking System

Driving200

FFrroonntt

＊＊

＊＊

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safe,prudent speed for the road andweather conditions.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock. Slow down and allow a greaterdistance between vehicles underthose conditions.

The ABS is self-checking. If anythinggoes wrong, the ABS indicator onthe instrument panel comes on (seepage ). This means the anti-lockfunction of the braking system hasshut down. The brakes still work likea conventional system without anti-lock, providing normal stoppingability. You should have the dealerinspect your car as soon as possible.

itonly helps with steering controlduring braking. You should alwaysmaintain a safe following distancefrom other vehicles.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your car to veer intooncoming traffic or off the road.

59

CONTINUED

Important Safety Reminders ABS Indicator

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stopABS does not reduce the time or

distance it takes to stop the car,

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

The Braking System

Driving 201

UU..SS.. iinnddiiccaattoorr sshhoowwnn

AABBSS IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

The TCS monitors the speed of allfour wheels. When it senses a frontwheel losing traction, it appliesbraking to that wheel. The TCSindicator flashes when this occurs.

Driving with TCS requires no specialskills or technique. The TCS doesnot control your car’s whole brakingsystem and cannot prevent skiddingif you enter a corner too fast. It isstill your responsibility to drive atreasonable speeds and to leave asufficient margin of safety.

Your Honda is equipped with aTraction Control System (TCS) toassist you in maintaining tractionwhile driving slowly on loose orslippery surfaces. The TCS assistsonly in low-speed, low-tractionconditions; up to approximately 25mph (40 km/h).

The TCS indicator will come onalong with the ABS indicator if thereis a problem with the anti-lock brakesystem.

On all V6 modelsOn all V6 models

Driving

The Braking System, Traction Control System

Traction Control System

202

TTRRAACCTTIIOONN CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMMIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

When starting out or driving at lowspeeds on a loose or slippery roadsurface, you may notice that thevehicle does not respond to theaccelerator in the same way it doesat other times. This is a sign the TCSis activating. You will see the TCSindicator light flash.

Driving with the compact spare tireinstalled (see page ) mayactivate the TCS. You should turn offthe system.

If the brakes overheat while the TCSis activating, the TCS indicator willstop flashing and stay on temporarily.This indicates that the TCS systemhas turned off. After the brakes havecooled down (usually for about 10minutes), the TCS will turn back onand the indicator will turn off.

This switch is under the side vent. Itlets you turn the Traction ControlSystem on and off. You cannot turnoff the TCS while the TCS indicatorlight is flashing.

Deactivate the system by pressingthe TCS On/Off switch. The TCSindicator light comes on as areminder. Pressing the switch againturns the system back on.

You should still install winter tires onyour car during the winter. Makesure to use the same size originallysupplied with vehicle. Exercise thesame caution in winter driving as youwould if your car was not equippedwith TCS.

294

CONTINUED

TCS ON/OFF Switch


Driving 203

TTCCSS OONN//OOFFFF SSWWIITTCCHH

This indicator will come on alongwith the ABS indicator if there is aproblem in the anti-lock brakesystem (see on page

).

The TCS indicator may occasionallycome on for one or two seconds andthen go out. This is normal.

The Traction Control System turnson every time you start the engine,even if you turned it off the last timeyou drove the vehicle.

The TCS indicator comes on orflashes under the following condi-tions:

When you turn the ignition switchto ON (II).

When you manually turn off theTCS.

It flashes when the TCS isregulating wheelspin.

If the system’s diagnostics sensesa problem in the TCS, the indica-tor will come on and stay on.

If the brakes overheat, theindicator will come on.

If the TCS indicator comes on andstays on for more than 10 minuteswhile driving, pull to the side of theroad when it is safe and turn off theengine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine, and watch theTCS indicator. If the indicatorremains on, or comes back on whiledriving, have the system inspectedby your Honda dealer. You can stilldrive the vehicle without TCS.

201ABS Indicator

TCS Indicator


Driving204

－ Always driveslower than you would in dryweather. It takes your car longer toreact, even in conditions that mayseem just barely damp. Applysmooth, even pressure to all thecontrols. Abrupt steering wheelmovements or sudden, hard appli-cation of the brakes can cause loss ofcontrol in wet weather. Be extracautious for the first few miles(kilometers) of driving while youadjust to the change in drivingconditions. This is especially true insnow. A person can forget somesnow-driving techniques during thesummer months. Practice is neededto relearn those skills.

Exercise extra caution when drivingin rain after a long dry spell. Aftermonths of dry weather, the firstrains bring oil to the surface of theroadway, making it slippery.

Rain, fog, and snow conditionsrequire a different driving techniquebecause of reduced traction andvisibility. Keep your car well-maintained and exercise greatercaution when you need to drive inbad weather. The cruise controlshould not be used in theseconditions.

CONTINUED

Driving Technique

Driving in Bad Weather

Driving 205

－－Being able to seeclearly in all directions and beingvisible to other drivers are importantin all weather conditions. This ismore difficult in bad weather. To beseen more clearly during daylighthours, turn on your headlights.

Check your tiresfrequently for wear and properpressure. Both are important inpreventing ‘‘hydroplaning’’ (loss oftraction on a wet surface). In thewinter, mount snow tires on all fourwheels for the best handling.

Watch road conditions carefully,they can change from moment tomoment. Wet leaves can be as slip-pery as ice. ‘‘Clear’’ roads can havepatches of ice. Driving conditionscan be very hazardous when theoutside temperature is near freezing.The road surface can becomecovered with areas of water puddlesmixed with areas of ice, so yourtraction can change without warning.

Be careful when downshifting. Iftraction is low, you can lock up thedrive wheels for a moment and causea skid.

Inspect your windshield wipers andwashers frequently. Keep the wind-shield washer reservoir full of theproper fluid. Have the windshieldwiper blades replaced if they start tostreak the windshield or leave partsunwiped. Use the defroster and airconditioning to keep the windowsfrom fogging up on the inside (seepages and ).

Be very cautious when passing, orbeing passed by other vehicles. Thespray from large vehicles reducesyour visibility, and the wind buffetingcan cause you to lose control.123 131

Visibility Traction

Driving in Bad Weather

Driving206

Your Honda has been designedprimarily to carry passengers andtheir cargo. You can use it to tow atrailer if you carefully observe theload limits, use the proper equipment,and follow the guidelines in thissection.

The totalweight of the trailer andeverything loaded in it must notexceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg). Towinga load that is too heavy canseriously affect your vehicle’shandling and performance. It canalso damage the engine anddrivetrain.

The weight thatthe tongue of a fully-loaded trailerputs on the hitch should beapproximately 10 percent of thetrailer weight. Too little tongueload can make the trailer unstableand cause it to sway. Too muchtongue load reduces front-tiretraction and steering control.

CONTINUED

Total Trailer Weight: Tongue Load:

Load Limits

Towing a Trailer

Driving 207

The total weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, all cargo, and thetongue load must not exceed:

To achieve a proper tongue load,start by loading 60 percent of theload toward the front of the trailerand 40 percent toward the rear, thenre-adjust the load as needed.

The total weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, all cargo, thetongue load must not exceed:

(LX)

(EX)

(LX-V6, EX-V6)

on the front axle

(LX)

(EX)

(LX-V6, EX-V6)

on the rear axle

(LX)

(EX)

(LX-V6, EX-V6)

and

Towing a Trailer

Driving

Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR):

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR):

208

2,160 lbs (980 kg)

2,185 lbs (990 kg)

2,315 lbs (1,050 kg)

1,895 lbs (860 kg)

1,920 lbs (870 kg)

1,940 lbs (880 kg)

3,990 lbs (1,810 kg)

4,035 lbs (1,830 kg)

4,235 lbs (1,920 kg)

Exceeding load limits orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriouslyinjured or killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

Towing can require a variety ofequipment, depending on the size ofyour trailer, how it will be used, andhow much load you are towing.

Discuss your needs with your trailersales or rental agency, and follow theguidelines in the rest of this section.Also make sure that all equipment isproperly installed and that it meetsfederal, state, province, and localregulations.

Any hitch used on your vehicle mustbe properly bolted to the underbody.

The best way to confirm that vehicleand trailer weights are within limitsis to have them checked at a publicscale.

Using a suitable scale or a specialtongue load gauge, check the tongueload the first time you set up atowing combination (a fully-loadedvehicle and trailer), then recheck thetongue load whenever the conditionschange.

Always use safety chains. Make surethey are secured to both the trailerand hitch, and that they cross underthe tongue so they can catch thetrailer if it becomes unhitched.Leave enough slack to allow thetrailer to turn corners easily, but donot let the chains drag on the ground.

CONTINUED

Towing Equipment andAccessories

Checking Loads

Hitches

Safety Chains

Towing a Trailer

Driving 209

Honda recommends that any trailerhaving a total weight of 1,000 lbs(450 kg) or more be equipped withits own electric or surge-type brakes.

If you choose electric brakes, besure they are electronically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into yourvehicle’s hydraulic system. Nomatter how successful it may seem,any attempt to attach trailer brakesto your vehicle’s hydraulic systemwill lower braking effectiveness andcreate a potential hazard. Since lighting and wiring vary in

trailer type and brand, you shouldalso have a qualified mechanic installa suitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer.

If you use a converter, you can getthe connector and pins that matewith the connector in your car fromyour Honda dealer.

Your car has a trailer lightingconnector located in the trunk by theleft taillight. Refer to the drawingabove for the wiring color code andpurpose of each pin.

Trailer Brakes Trailer Lights

Towing a Trailer

Driving210

GGRROOUUNNDD((BBLLAACCKK))

BBAACCKK--UUPP LLIIGGHHTT((GGRREEEENN//BBLLAACCKK))

LLEEFFTT TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL((GGRREEEENN//BBLLUUEE))

RRIIGGHHTT TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL((GGRREEEENN//YYEELLLLOOWW))

TTAAIILLLLIIGGHHTT((RREEDD//BBLLAACCKK))

BBRRAAKKEE LLIIGGHHTT((WWHHIITTEE//BBLLAACCKK))

Your vehicle tires and spare areproperly inflated (see page ),and the trailer tires and spare areinflated as recommended by thetrailer maker.

When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the tires, brakes,suspension, and cooling systemare in good operating condition.

All weights and loads are withinlimits (see pages and ).

All items on and in the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

The lights and brakes on yourvehicle and the trailer are workingproperly.

Many states and Canadian provincesrequire special outside mirrors whentowing a trailer. Even if they don’t,you should install special mirrors ifyou cannot clearly see behind you, orif the trailer creates a blind spot.

Ask your trailer sales or rentalagency if any other items arerecommended or required for yourtowing situation.

The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

207 208

265Pre-Tow ChecklistAdditional Trailer Equipment

Towing a Trailer

Driving 211

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed and shift down to 2ndgear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, andremember it will take longer to slowdown and stop when towing a trailer.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesdiscussed below.

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (Hot) mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

If the automatic transmission shiftsfrequently between 3rd and 4thgears while going up a hill, shift toD .

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.If you have an automatictransmission, use the D positionwhen towing a trailer on level roads.D is the proper shift lever positionto use when towing a trailer in hillyterrain. (See ‘‘ ’’ in thenext column for additional gearinformation.)

3

4

3

Driving Safely With a Trailer

Towing Speeds and Gears

Making Turns and Braking

Driving on Hills

Driving on Hills

Towing a Trailer

Driving212

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause trailerswaying. When being passed by alarge vehicle, keep a constant speedand steer straight ahead. Do not tryto make quick steering or brakingcorrections.

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steeringwheel; then turn the wheel to the leftto get the trailer to move to the left,and turn the wheel right to move thetrailer to the right.

Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including firmly setting theparking brake and putting thetransmission in Park (automatic) orin 1st or Reverse (manual). Also,place wheel chocks at each of thetrailer’s tires.

bottom

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Backing Up

Parking

Towing a Trailer

Driving 213

This section also includesMaintenance Schedules for normaldriving and severe driving conditions,a Maintenance Record, and instruc-tions for simple maintenance tasksyou may want to take care ofyourself.

If you have the skills and tools to per-form more complex maintenancetasks on your Honda, you may wantto purchase the Service Manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your Hondadealer.

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your car wellmaintained and to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

......................Maintenance Safety . 216.Important Safety Precautions . 217

.................Maintenance Schedule . 218...Required Maintenance Record . 225

.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 227..............................Fluid Locations . 228

......................................Engine Oil . 230..................................Adding Oil . 230

....................Recommended Oil . 230..............................Synthetic Oil . 232

....................................Additives . 232.....Changing the Oil and Filter . 232

.............................Cooling System . 235............Adding Engine Coolant . 235

.......Replacing Engine Coolant . 237....................Windshield Washers . 242

.......................Transmission Fluid . 243Automatic

.........................Transmission . 2435-speed Manual

.........................Transmission . 245................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 246

............................Brake System . 246...........................Clutch System . 247

..............................Power Steering . 248.....................Air Cleaner Element . 249

....................................Hood Latch . 251Spark Plugs

..............(4-cylinder Models) . 251..............................Replacement . 251

............................Specifications . 252Spark Plugs

..............(6-cylinder Models) . 253..............................Replacement . 253............................Specifications . 255

...........................................Battery . 256.................................Wiper Blades . 259

..............Air Conditioning System . 261.................Air Conditioning Filter . 262

.....................................Drive Belts . 262....................................Timing Belt . 263

...............................................Tires . 264......................................Inflation . 264

..................................Inspection . 265..............................Maintenance . 266.............................Tire Rotation . 267

...Replacing Tires and Wheels . 267......................Wheels and Tires . 268

..........................Winter Driving . 268.............................Snow Tires . 269............................Tire Chains . 269

.............................................Lights . 270.....................Headlight Aiming . 272

........................Replacing Bulbs . 272...........................Storing Your Car . 283

345

Maintenance

Maintenance 215

This section includes instructions forsimple maintenance tasks, such aschecking and adding oil. Any serviceitems not detailed in this sectionshould be performed by a Hondatechnician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Regularly maintaining your car is thebest way to protect your investment.Proper maintenance is essential toyour safety and the safety of yourpassengers. It will also reward youwith more economical, trouble-freedriving and help reduce air pollution.

Maintenance Safety

Maintenance216

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

Improperly maintaining this caror failing to correct a problembefore driving can cause acrash in which you can beseriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual.

Be surethere is adequate ventilationwhenever you operate the engine.

Let theengine and exhaust system coolbefore touching any parts.

Donot run the engine unless in-structed to do so.

Read the instructions before youbegin, and make sure you have thetools and skills required.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, be careful when workingaround gasoline or batteries. Use acommercially available degreaser orparts cleaner, not gasoline, to cleanparts. Keep cigarettes, sparks, andflames away from the battery and allfuel-related parts.

Before you begin any maintenance,make sure your car is parked onlevel ground and that the parkingbrake is set. Also, be sure the engineis off. This will help to eliminateseveral potential hazards:

You should wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingnear the battery or when usingcompressed air.

Maintenance Safety

Maintenance

Important Safety Precautions

Carbon monoxide poisoningfrom engine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

Injury from moving parts.

217

The Maintenance Schedule specifieshow often you should have your carserviced and what things needattention. It is essential that you haveyour car serviced as scheduled toretain its high level of safety,dependability, and emissions controlperformance.

The services and time or distanceintervals shown in the maintenanceschedule assume you will use yourcar as normal transportation forpassengers and their possessions.You should also follow theserecommendations:

Avoid exceeding your car’s loadlimit. This puts excess stress onthe engine, brakes, and manyother parts of your car. The loadlimit is shown on the label on thedriver’s doorjamb.

Operate your car on reasonableroads within the legal speed limit.

Drive your car regularly over adistance of several miles(kilometers).

Always use unleaded gasoline withthe proper octane rating (see page

).

Service your car according to thetime and mileage periods on one ofthe Maintenance Schedules on thefollowing pages. Select the schedulefor ‘‘Severe Conditions’’ if most ofyour driving is done under one ormore of the conditions listed on thatpage. Otherwise, follow the schedulefor ‘‘Normal Conditions.’’

174

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance

Which Schedule to Follow:

218

＃

We recommend the use of genuineHonda parts and fluids whenever youhave maintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same high-quality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, Hondarecommends that all maintenanceservices be performed at therecommended time or mileageperiod to ensure long-term reliability.

Your authorized Honda dealerknows your car best and can providecompetent, efficient service.However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Keep all thereceipts as proof of completion, andhave the person who does the workfill out the Maintenance Record.Check your warranty booklet formore information.

U.S. Cars:

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance

Maintenance, replacement orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPAstandards.

219

－

＊

＃

＃

＃

＊

Follow the Normal ConditionsMaintenance Schedule if thesevere driving conditionsspecified in the SevereConditions MaintenanceSchedule do not apply.

NOTE: If you onlydrive under a

‘‘severe’’ condition, you shouldfollow the Normal ConditionsMaintenance Schedule.

Follow the MaintenanceSchedule for Severe Conditions.

OCCASIONALLY

Maintenance

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

220

Visually inspect the following items:

Balancer belt applies to 4-cylinder

models only.

See information on maintenance and

emissions warranty, last column, page

.

miles x 1,000km x 1,000months

Service at the indicateddistance or time whichevercomes first.

Replace every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months

Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop

Rotate tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)

152412

304824

457236

609648

7512060

9014472

10516884

12019296

Every 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 72 months120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 72 months, thereafter every

90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 60 months

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsCooling system hoses and connectionsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120 months, thereafter every60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 60 months

Every 36 months (independent of mileage)

Replace engine oilReplace engine oil filterCheck engine oil and coolantReplace air cleaner elementInspect valve clearanceReplace spark plugsReplace timing belt, balancer belt , and inspectwater pumpInspect and adjust drive beltsInspect idle speedReplace engine coolant

Replace transmission fluid

Inspect front and rear brakesReplace brake fluidCheck parking brake adjustmentReplace air conditioning filterRotate tires (Check tire inflation and conditionat least once per month)

Adjust only if noisy

1 :

:

219

MTAT

1

Maintenance

ScheduleforN

ormalConditions

－－

□□□□□□□□□□

□□□□□□□

□

□□□

□

□

＃

＃＊

＃

＊

Maintenance 221

A, B, C, D

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

A

B

C

D

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, lastcolumn, page .Balancer belt applies to 4-cylinder models only.

Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.

NOTE:··

:219

:

Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time interval.Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.

Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.

7,500 mi/12,000 km15,000 mi/24,000 km/1 yr22,500 mi/36,000 km30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs37,500 mi/60,000 km45,000 mi/72,000 km/3 yrs52,500 mi/84,000 km60,000 mi/96,000 km/4 yrs67,500 mi/108,000 km75,000 mi/120,000 km/5 yrs82,500 mi/132,000 km90,000 mi/144,000 km/6 yrs97,500 mi/156,000 km105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 yrs

112,500 mi/180,000 km120,000 mi/192,000 km/8 yrs120,000 mi/192,000 km/10yrs

120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs

Replace engine oil.Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 267 ).Replace engine oil filter.Inspect front and rear brakes.Check parking brake adjustment.Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots.Inspect suspension components.Inspect driveshaft boots.Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and checkfor leaks.Inspect cooling system hoses and connections.Inspect exhaust system.Inspect fuel lines and connections.

Replace air cleaner element.Inspect and adjust drive belts.Replace air conditioning filter.Replace brake fluid every 3 years (independent ofmileage).

Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do items in A, B, D.Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C, D.Do items in A.

Replace timing belt, balancer belt , and inspectwater pump.

Check idle speed.Inspect valve clearance.Replace spark plugs.

Do items in A, B.Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C.

Replace engine coolant, thereafter replaceevery 60,000 mi/96,000 km/5 yrs.

Replace transmission fluid.M/T: every 120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrsA/T: 120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs, thereafterevery 90,000 mi/144,000 km/5 yrs

220 Maintenance

Schedule

forNorm

alConditions

(listedby

distance/time)

－

－

＊＊＊

＃

＃＃

＃＊＊＊

＊

Follow the Severe ConditionsMaintenance Schedule if youdrive your car underone or more of the followingconditions:

Driving less than 5 miles (8km) per trip or, in freezingtemperatures, driving lessthan 10 miles (16 km) per trip.Driving in extremely hot[over 90°F (32°C)] conditions.Extensive idling or longperiods of stop-and-go driving.Trailer towing, driving with aroof rack, or driving inmountainous conditions.Driving on muddy, dusty, orde-iced roads.

Follow the MaintenanceSchedule for Severe Conditions.

MAINLY

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

Maintenance222

Visually inspect the following items:

Service at the indicateddistance or time whichevercomes first.

miles x 1,000km x 1,000months

Replace every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 monthsCheck oil and coolant at each fuel stop

Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 36 months

Inspect every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months

Rotate tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)

Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 monthsTie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension components, Driveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and conditions of fluidsCooling system hoses and connectionsExhaust system, Fuel lines and connections

Lights and controls, Vehicle underbody

152412

304824

457236

609648

7512060

9014472

10516884

12019296

120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120 months, thereafter every60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 60 months

See Timing Belt on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.Balancer belt applies to 4-cylinder models only.

See information on maintenance and

emissions warranty, last column, page

.

See Air Conditioning Filter on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.

Every 36 months (independent of mileage)

Replace engine oil and oil filterCheck engine oil and coolantClean ( ) or replace ( ) air cleaner element

Use normal schedule except in dustyconditionsInspect valve clearanceReplace spark plugsReplace timing belt , balancer belt , and

inspect water pumpInspect and adjust drive beltsInspect idle speedReplace engine coolant

Replace transmission fluid

Inspect front and rear brakesReplace brake fluidCheck parking brake adjustmentReplace air conditioning filterLubricate all hinges, locks, and latchesRotate tires (Check tire inflation and conditionat least once per month)

Adjust only if noisy

MTAT

219

1 :2 :3 :

:

263

262

60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 36 months, thereafter every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months

1 1, 2

3

Maintenance

ScheduleforS

evereConditions

－－

□□□□□□□□

□□

□□□□□□□□□

□

□

□

□□

＃

＃

＊

＃＊＊＊

＊＊＊

＃

CONTINUEDMaintenance 223

A, B, C, D, E

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

A

B

C

D

E

Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time.Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.

Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.

Replace engine oil and filter.Inspect front and rear brakes.Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 267 ).Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots.Inspect suspension components.Inspect driveshaft boots.Check parking brake adjustment.Lubricate all hinges, locks, and latches withmultipurpose grease.Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and checkfor leaks.Inspect cooling system hoses and connections.Inspect exhaust system.Inspect fuel lines and connections.

Check all lights.Inspect the underbody.Replace air cleaner element.Inspect and adjust drive belts.Replace air conditioning filter .Replace brake fluid every 3 years (independent ofmileage).

3,750 mi/6,000 km7,500 mi/12,000 km11,250 mi/18,000 km15,000 mi/24,000 km/1 yr

18,750 mi/30,000 km22,500 mi/36,000 km26,250 mi/42,000 km30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs33,750 mi/54,000 km37,500 mi/60,000 km41,250 mi/66,000 km45,000 mi/72,000 km/3 yrs

48,750 mi/78,000 km52,500 mi/84,000 km56,250 mi/90,000 km60,000 mi/96,000 km/4 yrs

60,000 mi/96,000 km/3 yrs60,000 mi/96,000 km/3 yrs

63,750 mi/102,000 km67,500 mi/108,000 km71,250 mi/114,000 km

Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Clean air cleaner element.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C, D.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Clean air cleaner element.Do items in A, B, C, E.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Replace timing belt , balancer belt , andinspect water pump.Do items in A, B, C, D.

Replace MT fluid.Replace AT fluid, thereafter replace every

30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

222


See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .

See Timing Belt on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.Balancer belt applies to 4-cylinder models only.See Air Conditioning Filter on page for replacement information under special drivingconditions.

··

219NOTE:

1 :2 :3 :

:

262

263

3

1 1, 2

Maintenance

Schedule

forSevere

Conditions

(listedby

distance/time)

□

□

□

□□□□

□

□

□□

＊＊＊

＊＊＊

＊

＊＊

＃

Maintenance224

See Timing Belt on page for replacement information underspecial driving conditions.Balancer belt applies to 4-cylinder models only.See Air Conditioning Filter on page for replacementinformation under special driving conditions.See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, lastcolumn, page .


NOTE:··

1 :

2 :3 :

:

263

262

219

75,000 mi/120,000 km/5 yrs

78,750 mi/126,000 km82,500 mi/132,000 km86,250 mi/138,000 km90,000 mi/144,000 km/6 yrs90,000 mi/144,000 km/5 yrs93,750 mi/150,000 km97,500 mi/156,000 km101,250 mi/162,000 km105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 yrs

108,750 mi/174,000 km112,500 mi/180,000 km116,250 mi/186,000 km120,000 mi/192,000 km/8 yrs

120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs

120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs120,000 mi/192,000 km/7 yrs

Clean air cleaner element.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C, D, E.

Replace AT fluid.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Replace timing belt , balancer belt , andinspect water pump.

Check idle speed.Clean air cleaner element.Replace spark plugs.Inspect valve clearance.

Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Replace timing belt , balancer belt , andinspect water pump.Do items in A, B, C, D.

Replace engine coolant, thereafter replace every60,000 mi/96,000 km/5 yrs.

Replace MT fluid.Replace AT fluid.

1 1, 2

1 1, 2

Maintenance

ScheduleforS

evereConditions

(listed

bydistance/time)

CONTINUEDMaintenance

Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)

225

3,750 mi

7,500 mi

11,250 mi

15,000 mi

18,750 mi

22,500 mi

26,250 mi

30,000 mi

33,750 mi

37,500 mi

41,250 mi

45,000 mi

48,750 mi

52,500 mi

56,250 mi

60,000 mi

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page ) or severeconditions (page ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your car.

6,000 km

12,000 km

18,000 km

24,000 km(or 1 year)

30,000 km

36,000 km

42,000 km

48,000 km(or 2 years)

54,000 km

60,000 km

66,000 km


78,000 km

84,000 km

90,000 km


220222

Maintenance

Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)

226

63,750 mi

67,500 mi

71,250 mi

75,000 mi

78,750 mi

82,500 mi

86,250 mi

90,000 mi

93,750 mi

97,500 mi

101,250 mi

105,000 mi

108,750 mi

112,500 mi

116,250 mi

120,000 mi

Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

102,000 km

108,000 km

114,000 km


126,000 km

132,000 km

138,000 km


150,000 km

156,000 km

162,000 km


174,000 km

180,000 km

186,000 km


－

－

－

－

－

－

－

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the page given.

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Windshield washer fluid Checkthe level in the reservoir monthly.If weather conditions cause you touse the washers frequently, checkthe reservoir each time you stopfor fuel. See page .

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,turn signals, brake lights, andlicense plate lights monthly. Seepage .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

178

242

180

243

246

264

270

Owner Maintenance Checks

Maintenance 227

Maintenance

Fluid Locations

4-cylinder Models

228

BBRRAAKKEE FFLLUUIIDD((GGrraayy ccaapp))

EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK((OOrraannggee lloooopp))

WWAASSHHEERR FFLLUUIIDD((BBlluuee ccaapp))

RRAADDIIAATTOORR CCAAPP

EENNGGIINNEECCOOOOLLAANNTTRREESSEERRVVOOIIRR

AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICCTTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONNFFLLUUIIDD DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK((YYeellllooww lloooopp))

CCLLUUTTCCHH FFLLUUIIDD((55--ssppeeeedd MMaannuuaallTTrraannssmmiissssiioonn oonnllyy))((GGrraayy ccaapp))

PPOOWWEERR SSTTEEEERRIINNGGFFLLUUIIDD((RReedd ccaapp))

EENNGGIINNEE OOIILLFFIILLLL CCAAPP((BBllaacckk ccaapp))

Fluid Locations

Maintenance

6-cylinder Models

229

PPOOWWEERR SSTTEEEERRIINNGGFFLLUUIIDD ((RReedd ccaapp))

BBRRAAKKEE FFLLUUIIDD((GGrraayy ccaapp))

WWAASSHHEERR FFLLUUIIDD((BBlluuee ccaapp))

EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK((OOrraannggee lloooopp))


EENNGGIINNEE CCOOOOLLAANNTTRREESSEERRVVOOIIRR

AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICCTTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONNFFLLUUIIDD DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK((YYeellllooww lloooopp))

EENNGGIINNEE OOIILLFFIILLLL CCAAPP((BBllaacckk ccaapp))

To add oil, unscrew and remove theengine oil fill cap on top of the valvecover. Pour in the oil, and install theengine oil fill cap. Tighten it securely.Wait a few minutes and recheck theoil level. Do not fill above the uppermark; you could damage the engine.

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 5W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements.

Honda Motor Oil is the preferred5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection.

Recommended OilAdding Oil

Maintenance

Engine Oil

230

EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL FFIILLLL CCAAPP


EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL FFIILLLL CCAAPP


Make sure the API Certification Sealsays ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’

The SAE number tells you the oil’sviscosity or weight. Select the oil foryour vehicle according to this chart.

5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your Honda, toimprove cold weather starting, andto help your engine use less fuel.

If 5W-20 oil is not available, a 5W-30oil may be used. However, it shouldbe replaced with 5W-20 at the nextoil change.

Engine Oil

Maintenance 231

AAmmbbiieenntt TTeemmppeerraattuurree

AAPPII CCEERRTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN SSEEAALL

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the time and distance(miles/kilometers) recommenda-tions in the maintenance schedule.The oil and filter collect contami-nants that can damage your engine ifthey are not removed regularly.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Open the hood and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the car. The car shouldbe raised on a service station-typehydraulic lift for this service. Unlessyou have the knowledge and properequipment, you should have thismaintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Seal,and it is the proper weight as shownon the chart. When using syntheticoil, you must follow the oil and filterchange intervals given in themaintenance schedule.

Your Honda does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect your engine’s or transmission’sperformance and durability.

1.

2.

Maintenance

Engine Oil

Synthetic Oil

Additives

Changing the Oil and Filter

232


WWAASSHHEERR DDRRAAIINN BBOOLLTT

CONTINUED

Remove the oil filter and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourHonda dealer) is required toremove the filter.

Install a new oil filter according toinstructions that come with it.

4.3.

Engine Oil

Maintenance 233

WWAASSHHEERR OOIILL FFIILLTTEERR

66--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss 44--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss 66--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss

DDRRAAIINN BBOOLLTT OOIILL FFIILLTTEERR

Let the engine run for severalminutes and check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Turn off the engine, let it sit forseveral minutes, then check the oillevel. If necessary, add oil to bringthe level to the upper mark on thedipstick.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten it to:

Refill the engine with the recom-mended oil.Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Replace the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator light should go out withinfive seconds. If it does not, turn offthe engine and reinspect yourwork.

9.

8.

7.

6.

5.

(LX-V6, EX-V6)

(LX, EX)

(LX, EX)

(LX-V6, EX-V6)

Engine Oil

Maintenance234

33 lbf·ft (44 N·m , 4.5 kgf·m)

4.6 US qt (4.4 , 3.9 Imp qt)

4.5 US qt (4.3 , 3.8 Imp qt)

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmful to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.This coolant should always be amixture of 50 percent antifreeze and50 percent water. Never add straightantifreeze or plain water.

Always use Honda All SeasonAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Thiscoolant is pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent water. Itdoes not require any additionalmixing. If it is not available, you mayuse another major-brand non-silicatecoolant as a temporary replacement.Make sure it is a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.However, continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result in

corrosion, causing the coolingsystem to malfunction or fail. Havethe cooling system flushed andrefilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

1.

CONTINUED

Adding Engine Coolant

Maintenance

Cooling System

235

66--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss44--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

Turn the radiator cap counter-clockwise, without pressing downon it, until it stops. This relievesany pressure remaining in thecooling system.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Put the radiator cap back on.Tighten it fully.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

3.

2. 4.

5.

6.

Cooling System

Maintenance236



RRAADDIIAATTOORR CCAAPP 44--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK

CONTINUED

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your car’s coolingsystem. They may not be compatiblewith the coolant or engine compo-nents.

Turn the ignition ON (II). Turnthe heater temperature controldial to maximum heat (climatecontrol to 90°F/32°C). Turn offthe ignition. Open the hood. Makesure the engine and radiator arecool to the touch.

Remove the radiator cap.

The cooling system should becompletely drained and refilled withnew coolant according to the timeand distance recommendations inthe maintenance schedule. Only useHonda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.

Draining the coolant requires accessto the underside of the car. Unlessyou have the tools and knowledge,you should have this maintenancedone by a skilled mechanic. 1.

2.

Cooling System

Maintenance

Replacing Engine Coolant

237

RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK66--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss


4-cylinder models 6-cylinder modelsLoosen the drain plug on thebottom of the radiator. Thecoolant will drain through thesplash guard. Remove the drainbolt and washer from the engineblock.

Loosen the drain plug on thebottom of the radiator. Thecoolant will drain through thesplash guard. Loosen the drainbolt.

3.

Maintenance

Cooling System

238

66--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss 44--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss 66--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss DDRRAAIINN BBOOLLTT

DDRRAAIINNPPLLUUGG

DDRRAAIINNBBOOLLTT

DDRRAAIINN PPLLUUGG

CONTINUED

Remove the reserve tank from itsholder by pulling it straight up.Drain the coolant, then put thetank back in its holder.

When removing the reserve tank,first remove the cruise control cableand the ground cable from their clips.After installing the tank back inplace, put the cables back in theirclips.

4. 6-cylinder models

Cooling System

Maintenance 239

RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK


RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKKRREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK CCAAPP

HHOOLLDDEERR

RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK CCAAPP

HHOOLLDDEERR

GGRROOUUNNDD CCAABBLLEE

CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL CCAABBLLEE

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

With automatic transmission:

With 5-speed manual transmission:4-cylinder models

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder modelsPut a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt in theengine block. Tighten it securely.Tightening torque:

Tighten the drain bolt at the rearof the engine cylinder blocksecurely.Tightening torque:

When the coolant stops draining,tighten the drain plug at thebottom of the radiator.

Loosen the bleeder bolt on top ofthe engine.

Pour Honda All SeasonAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2 intothe radiator. This coolant is amixture of 50 percent antifreezeand 50 percent water. Pre-mixingis not required.

The cooling system capacity is:

Tighten the bleeder bolt whencoolant comes out in a steadystream with no bubbles.

Pour coolant into the radiator upto the base of the filler neck.

7.

6.

5.

Cooling System

Maintenance240

BBLLEEEEDDEERR BBOOLLTT

61 lbf·ft (83 N·m , 8.5 kgf·m)

7 lbf·ft (10 N·m , 1.0 kgf·m)

1.43 US gal (5.4 , 1.19 Imp gal)

1.45 US gal (5.5 , 1.21 Imp gal)

1.48 US gal (5.6 , 1.23 Imp gal)

Fill the radiator with coolant up tothe base of the filler neck.

Fill the reserve tank to the MAXmark. Install the reserve tank cap.

Install the radiator cap, andtighten it to the first stop.

Start the engine and let it run untilthe radiator cooling fan comes onat least twice. Then stop theengine.

Remove the radiator cap. Pourcoolant into the radiator up to thebase of the filler neck and into thereserve tank up to the MAX mark.

Start the engine and hold it at1,500 rpm until the radiator fancomes on. Turn off the engine.Check the coolant level in theradiator and add coolant if needed.

Install the radiator cap, andtighten it fully.

If necessary, fill the reserve tankto the MAX mark. Install thereserve tank cap.

Start the engine and let it run forabout 30 seconds. Then turn offthe engine.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

8.

Cooling System

Maintenance 241

44--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss FFiillll uupp ttoo hheerree

FFIILLLLEERR NNEECCKK FFIILLLLEERR NNEECCKK

66--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss FFiillll uupp ttoo hheerree

Check the level in the windshieldwasher reservoir at least monthlyduring normal usage. In bad weather,when you use the washers often,check the level every time you stopfor fuel.

The windshield washer reservoir islocated behind the driver’s sideheadlight.

The windshield washer reservoir islocated behind the passenger’s sideheadlight.

The low washer level indicator willlight when the level is low (see page

).

Check the reservoir’s fluid level byremoving the cap and looking at thelevel gauge attached to the cap.

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition the blade edges.

62

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

On Canadian models

Windshield Washers

Maintenance242

LLEEVVEELL GGAAUUGGEE


LLEEVVEELL GGAAUUGGEE

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir.

Antif reeze can damage your car’s paint,while a vinegar/water solution candamage the windshield washer pump.

Use only commercially-availablewindshield washer f luid.

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Park the car on level ground. Shutoff the engine.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED


Transmission Fluid

Maintenance 243

UUPPPPEERR MMAARRKK

LLOOWWEERR MMAARRKK

DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK44--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss

DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK

66--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK 44--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss

－

－

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid to bring it to theupper mark.

Add fluid in thedipstick tube.

Remove the fillplug to add fluid.

Always use Honda ATF-Z1(Automatic Transmission Fluid). Ifit is not available, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect shift quality. Havethe transmission flushed andrefilled with Honda ATF-Z1 assoon as it is convenient.

To thoroughly flush thetransmission, the technicianshould drain and refill it withHonda ATF-Z1, then drive thevehicle a short distance. Do this

three times. Then drain and refillthe transmission a final time.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your Honda dealer.

5.

6.

4.

4-cylinder cars

6-cylinder cars

Maintenance

Transmission Fluid

244

DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK


UUPPPPEERR MMAARRKK

LLOOWWEERR MMAARRKK

If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an API service SG, SH or SJgrade motor oil with a viscosity ofSAE 10W-30 or 10W-40 as atemporary replacement. An SGgrade is preferred, but an SH or SJgrade may be used if SG is notavailable. However, motor oil doesnot contain the proper additives andcontinued use can cause stiffershifting. Replace as soon as it isconvenient.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the car sitting onlevel ground. Remove thetransmission filler bolt and carefullyfeel inside the bolt hole with yourfinger. The fluid level should be upto the edge of the bolt hole. If it isnot, add Honda Manual Transmis-sion Fluid (MTF) until it starts torun out of the hole. Reinstall thefiller bolt and tighten it securely.

Transmission Fluid

Maintenance


245

FFIILLLLEERRBBOOLLTT

CCoorrrreecctt lleevveell

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement. However, the use ofany non-Honda brake fluid can causecorrosion and decrease the life of thesystem. Have the brake systemflushed and refilled with HondaHeavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 assoon as possible.

Check the fluid level in the reser-voirs monthly. There are up to tworeservoirs, depending on the model.They are:

Brake fluid reservoir (all models)Clutch fluid reservoir(manual transmission only)

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

The brake fluid should be replacedaccording to the time recommenda-tion in the maintenance schedule.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your car’s brakingsystem and can cause extensivedamage.

Maintenance

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Brake System

246

MMAAXX

44--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss MMIINN

The fluid should be between theMIN and MAX marks on the side ofthe reservoir. If it is not, add brakefluid to bring it up to that level. Usethe same fluid specified for thebrake system.

Low fluid level can indicate a leak inthe clutch system. Have this systeminspected as soon as possible.

Clutch System

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Maintenance 247

MMAAXX

MMIINN66--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss MMIINN

MMAAXX

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. If it is not available, you mayuse another power steering fluid asan emergency replacement.However, continued use can causeincreased wear and poor steering incold weather. Have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

Check the level when the engine iscold. Look at the side of thereservoir. The fluid should bebetween the UPPER LEVEL andLOWER LEVEL. If it is below theLOWER LEVEL, add power steeringfluid to the UPPER LEVEL.

Power Steering

Maintenance248


UUPPPPEERR LLEEVVEELL

LLOOWWEERR LLEEVVEELL

UUPPPPEERR LLEEVVEELL

LLOOWWEERR LLEEVVEELL

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

Carefully clean the inside of theair cleaner housing with a damprag.

Remove the old air cleanerelement.

Unsnap the four hold-down clampsand remove the air cleanerhousing cover.

To replace it:

The air cleaner element is inside theair cleaner housing on the passenger’sside of the engine compartment.

The air cleaner element should becleaned or replaced according to thetime and distance recommendationsin the maintenance schedule.

Clean the air cleaner element byblowing compressed air through it inthe opposite direction to normal airflow. If you do not have access tocompressed air (such as a servicestation), ask your Honda dealer to dothis service.

Follow the replacement procedurefor removal and reinstallation.

Reinstall the air cleaner housingcover, snap the four hold-downclamps back into place.

Place the new air cleaner elementin the air cleaner housing.1.

3.

4.

5.

2.

Replacement

Cleaning (Severe Conditions)

4-cylinder Models

Air Cleaner Element

Maintenance 249

AAIIRR CCLLEEAANNEERR EELLEEMMEENNTT

HHOOLLDD--DDOOWWNN CCLLAAMMPPSS

Place the new air cleaner elementin the air cleaner housing.

Reinstall the air cleaner housingcover, tighten the four bolts.

To replace it:

The air cleaner element is inside theair cleaner housing on the driver’sside of the engine compartment.

Loosen the four bolts by using aPhillips-head screwdriver andremove the air cleaner housingcover.

Remove the old air cleanerelement.

Carefully clean the inside of theair cleaner housing with a damprag.

1.

3.

4.

5.

2.

Replacement6-cylinder Models

Air Cleaner Element

Maintenance250

AAIIRR CCLLEEAANNEERR EELLEEMMEENNTT

BBOOLLTTSS

Clean up any dirt and oil aroundthe spark plug caps.

Remove the spark plug cap bypulling it straight out.

Remove the spark plug witha five-eighths inch (16 mm) sparkplug socket.

The spark plugs in your car shouldbe replaced according to the timeand distance recommendations inthe maintenance schedule.

Clean the hood latch assembly with amild cleaner, then lubricate it with amultipurpose grease. Lubricate allthe moving parts (as shown),including the pivot. To lubricatethem, remove the holding clip andpull the cover away. Follow the timeand distance recommendations inthe Maintenance Schedule. If youare not sure how to clean and greasethe latch, contact your Honda dealer.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Hood Latch Spark Plugs Replacement

Hood Latch, Spark Plugs (4-cylinder Models)

Maintenance 251

SSPPAARRKK PPLLUUGG CCAAPP

PPIIVVOOTTSSLLAATTCCHH AASSSSEEMMBBLLYY

＋－

Spark Plug Gap:

Install the spark plug cap.

Repeat this procedure for theother three spark plugs.

Torque the spark plug. (If you donot have a torque wrench, tightenthe spark plug two-thirds of a turnafter it contacts the cylinder head.)Tightening torque:

Put the new spark plug into thesocket; then screw it into the hole.Screw it in by hand so you do notcrossthread it.

5.

6.

7.

NGK:DENSO:

4.Specifications:

Spark Plugs (4-cylinder Models)

Maintenance252

0.04 in (1.1 mm)13 lbf·ft (18 N·m , 1.8 kgf·m)

PZFR5F-11PKJ16CR-L11

00.1 mm

Tighten the spark plugs caref ully. Aspark plug that is too loose canoverheat and damage the engine.Overtightening can cause damage tothe threads in the cylinder head.

CONTINUED

The spark plugs in your car shouldbe replaced according to the timeand distance recommendations inthe maintenance schedule.

Clean up any dirt and oil that havecollected around the ignition coils.

Disconnect the wire connectorfrom the ignition coil by pushingon the lock tab and pulling on theconnector. Pull on the plasticconnector, not the wires.

Loosen the two holding clips byturning the heads one-quarter turncounterclockwise with a flat-tippedscrewdriver. Remove the cover onthe front cylinder bank by pullingit straight up.

1. 2.

3.

Maintenance


Replacement

253

HHOOLLDDIINNGG CCLLIIPP

Use a wrench to remove thehexagon socket head cap boltholding the ignition coil. Removethe ignition coil by pulling itstraight out.

Remove the spark plug witha five-eighths inch (16 mm) sparkplug socket.

Put the new spark plug into thesocket; then screw it into the hole.Screw it in by hand so you do notcrossthread it.

Torque the spark plug. (If you donot have a torque wrench, tightenthe spark plug two-thirds of a turnafter it contacts the cylinder head.)Tightening torque:

4. 5.

6.

7.


Maintenance254

HHEEXXAAGGOONN SSOOCCKKEETT HHEEAADD CCAAPP BBOOLLTT

13 lbf·ft (18 N·m , 1.8 kgf·m)

＋－

Install the ignition coil. Reinstallthe hexagon socket head cap bolt.

Push the wire connector onto theignition coil. Make sure it locks inplace.

Repeat this procedure for theother five spark plugs.

Reinstall the cover on the frontcylinder bank while putting itsmounting clip in the hole on thepassenger’s side. Secure the coverby turning the heads of the twoholding clips one-quarter turnclockwise with a flat-tippedscrewdriver.

Spark Plug Gap:

NGK:DENSO:

8.

9.

10.

11.


Maintenance

Specifications:

255

0.04 in (1.1 mm)

PKJ16CR-L11PZFR5F-11

00.1 mm

Tighten the spark plugs caref ully. Aspark plug that is too loose canoverheat and damage the engine.Overtightening can cause damage tothe threads in the cylinder head.

Check the battery condition bylooking at the test indicator windowon the battery.The label on the battery explains thetest indicator’s colors.

Check the condition of your car’sbattery monthly. You should checkthe color of the test indicator window,and for corrosion on the terminals.

Check the battery terminals forcorrosion (a white or yellowishpowder). To remove it, cover theterminals with a solution of bakingsoda and water. It will bubble up andturn brown. When this stops, wash itoff with plain water. Dry off thebattery with a cloth or paper towel.Coat the terminals with grease tohelp prevent future corrosion.

Battery posts,terminals and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

Battery

Maintenance

WARNING:

Wash hands after handling.

256

TTEESSTT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR WWIINNDDOOWW


TTEESSTT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR WWIINNDDOOWW


－

If the terminals are severely cor-roded, clean them with baking sodaand water. Then use a wrench toloosen and remove the cables fromthe terminals. Always disconnect thenegative ( ) cable first and recon-nect it last. Clean the battery termi-nals with a terminal cleaning tool orwire brush. Reconnect and tightenthe cables, then coat the terminalswith grease.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damage to the car’selectrical system.

CONTINUED

Battery

Maintenance 257


The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledmechanic do the batterymaintenance.

If your car’s battery is disconnectedor goes dead, the audio system willdisable itself. The next time you turnon the radio you will see ‘‘ ’’in the frequency display. Use thePreset buttons to enter the five-digitcode (see page ).171


Battery

Maintenance258

Charging the battery with the cablesconnected can seriously damage yourcar’s electronic controls. Detach thebattery cables bef ore connecting thebattery to a charger.

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every six months.Look for signs of cracking in therubber, or areas that are gettinghard. Replace the blades if you findthese signs, or they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe lock tab. Hold it in while youpush the blade assembly towardthe base of the arm.

Raise the wiper arm off thewindshield.

To replace the blade:

Raise the driver’s side first, thenthe passenger’s side.

2.

1.

CONTINUED

Wiper Blades

Maintenance 259

LLOOCCKK TTAABB

WWIIPPEERR AARRMMSS

Remove the blade from its holderby grasping the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metal rein-forcement along the back edge,remove the metal reinforcementstrips from the old wiper blade andinstall them in the slots along theedge of the new blade.

Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Lower the passenger’s side first,then the driver’s side.

3. 4.

5.

6.

7.

Wiper Blades

Maintenance260

RREEIINNFFOORRCCEEMMEENNTT

BBLLAADDEE BBLLAADDEE

Run the air conditioning at least oncea week during the cold weathermonths. Run it for at least tenminutes while you are driving at asteady speed with the engine atnormal operating temperature. Thiscirculates the lubricating oil con-tained in the refrigerant.

If the air conditioning does not get ascold as before, have your dealercheck the system. Recharge thesystem with Refrigerant HFC-134a(R-134a). (See Specifications onpages and .)

Your car’s air conditioning is a sealedsystem. Any major maintenance,such as recharging, should be doneby a qualified mechanic. You can doa couple of things to make sure theair conditioning works efficiently.

Periodically check the engine’sradiator and air conditioningcondenser for leaves, insects, anddirt stuck to the front surface. Theseblock the air flow and reduce coolingefficiency. Use a light spray from ahose or a soft brush to remove them.

326 328

Maintenance

Air Conditioning System

261

AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGGCCOONNDDEENNSSEERR

Whenever you have the air conditioningsystem serviced, make sure the servicef acility uses a ref rigerant recyclingsystem. This system captures theref rigerant f or reuse. Releasingref rigerant into the atmosphere candamage the environment.

The condenser and radiator f ins bendeasily. Only use a low-pressure sprayor sof t-bristle brush to clean them.

Check the condition of the drivebelts (two on 4-cylinder models, oneon 6-cylinder models). Examine theedges of each belt for cracks orfraying.

This filter should be replaced every30,000 miles (48,000 km) undernormal conditions. It should bereplaced every 15,000 miles (24,000km) if you drive primarily in urbanareas that have high concentrationsof soot in the air from industry anddiesel-powered vehicles. Replace itmore often if air flow from theheating and cooling system/climatecontrol system becomes less thanusual. Have the air conditioning filterreplaced by your Honda dealer.

Check the tension of each belt bypushing on it with your thumbmidway between the pulleys.

The air conditioning filter removespollen and dust that is brought infrom the outside through the heatingand cooling system/climate controlsystem.

Drive BeltsAir Conditioning Filter

Air Conditioning Filter, Drive Belts

Maintenance262


AALLTTEERRNNAATTOORR BBEELLTT

PPOOWWEERR SSTTEEEERRIINNGGBBEELLTT

PPOOWWEERR SSTTEEEERRIINNGG BBEELLTT

－－

－－

－－

－－

In very high temperatures(over 110°F, 43°C).In very low temperatures(under 20°F, 29°C).

Power steering belt:

Power steering belt:

Alternator belt:

The belts should have the following‘‘play’’ or deflection.

If you see signs of wear or looseness,have your dealer adjust or replacethe belts.

The timing belt and balancer belt (4-cylinder models only) shouldnormally be replaced at the intervalsshown in the maintenance schedule.

Replace these belts at 60,000 miles(U.S.) or 100,000 km (Canada) if youregularly drive your car in one ormore of these conditions:6-cylinder models

4-cylinder models

Timing Belt

Maintenance

Drive Belts, Timing Belt

263

0.51 0.65 in (13.0 16.5 mm)

0.51 0.63 in (13.0 16.0 mm)

0.28 0.35 in (7.0 9.0 mm)

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

We recommend that you visuallycheck your tires every day. If youthink a tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure at least once a month. Eventires that are in good condition maylose 1 to 2 psi (7 to 15 kPa, 0.07 to0.15 kgf/cm ) per month.Remember to check the spare tire atthe same time you check all theother tires.

To safely operate your car, your tiresmust be the proper type and size, ingood condition with adequate tread,and correctly inflated. The followingpages give more detailed informationon how and when to check airpressure, how to inspect your tiresfor damage and wear, and what to dowhen your tires need to be replaced.

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life and ridingcomfort. Underinflated tires wearunevenly, adversely affect handlingand fuel economy, and are morelikely to fail from being overheated.Overinflated tires can make your carride more harshly, are more prone todamage from road hazards, and wearunevenly.

Check the pressure in the tires whenthey are cold. This means the carhas been parked for at least threehours. If you have to drive the carbefore checking the tire pressure,the tires can still be considered‘‘cold’’ if you drive less than 1 mile(1.6 km).

If you check the pressure when thetires are hot (the car has been drivenseveral miles), you will see readings4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4kgf/cm ) higher than the coldreading. This is normal. Do not letair out to match the specified coldpressure. The tire will beunderinflated.

Inflation

Tires

Maintenance264

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

These pressures are also given onthe tire information label on thedriver’s doorjamb.

Tubeless tires have some ability toself-seal if they are punctured.However, because leakage is oftenvery slow, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

The following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal driving conditions andspeeds. Tire pressures for highspeed driving are the same as fornormal driving.

(EX-V6)

(LX-V6)

(LX, EX)

CONTINUED

Tire Size

Tire Size

Tire Size

Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal Driving



Recommended Tire Pressures forNormal Driving

Tires

Maintenance

Inspection

265

P195/65R15 89H 29 psi (200 kPa ,2.0 kgf/cm )

P205/60R16 91V 32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

P205/65R15 92V 30 psi (210 kPa ,2.1 kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

The tires were properly balanced bythe factory. They may need to berebalanced at some time before theyare worn out. Have your dealercheck the tires if you feel a consis-tent vibration while driving. A tireshould always be rebalanced if it isremoved from the wheel for repair.

Your car’s tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down to that point, youwill see a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wideband running across the tread. Thisshows there is less than 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. Atire that is this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see thetread wear indicator in three or moreplaces around the tire.

Make sure the installer balances thewheels when you have new tiresinstalled. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. Your car’soriginal tires were dynamic or ‘‘spin’’balanced at the factory. For bestresults, have the installer perform adynamic balance.

On some models

Maintenance

Tires

Maintenance266

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLOOCCAATTIIOONN MMAARRKKSS

TTRREEAADD WWEEAARR IINNDDIICCAATTOORRSS

Improper wheel weights can damageyour car’s aluminum wheels. Use onlyGenuine Honda wheel weights f orbalancing.

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, youshould have the tires rotated every7,500 miles (12,000 km). Move thetires to the positions shown in thechart each time they are rotated.

When shopping for replacementtires, you may find that some tiresare ‘‘directional.’’ This means theyare designed to rotate only in onedirection. If you use directional tires,they should be rotated only front-to-back.

The tires that came with your carwere selected to match the perform-ance capabilities of the car whileproviding the best combination ofhandling, ride comfort, and long life.You should replace them with radialtires of the same size, load range,speed rating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall). Mixing radial andbias-ply tires on your car can reduceits braking ability, traction, andsteering accuracy.

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, then replace the twofront tires or the two rear tires as apair. Replacing just one tire canseriously affect your car’s handling.

CONTINUED

Tire Rotation

Replacing Tires and Wheels

Tires

Maintenance 267

FFrroonntt FFrroonntt

((FFoorr NNoonn--ddiirreeccttiioonnaallTTiirreess aanndd WWhheeeellss))

((FFoorr DDiirreeccttiioonnaallTTiirreess aanndd WWhheeeellss))

Installing improper tires on yourcar can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

＋Wheel: Tires that are marked ‘‘M S’’ or‘‘All Season’’ on the sidewall have anall-weather tread design. Theyshould be suitable for most winterdriving conditions. Tires withoutthese markings are designed foroptimum traction in dry conditions.They may not provide adequateperformance in winter driving.For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

If you ever need to replace a wheel,make sure the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheelthat came on your car. Replacementwheels are available at your Hondadealer.

The ABS works by comparing thespeed of the wheels. When replacingtires, use the same size originallysupplied with the car. Tire size andconstruction can affect wheel speedand may cause the system to workinconsistently.

Tire:

See page for information aboutDOT Tire Quality Grading.

(LX, EX)

(LX-V6)

(EX-V6)

(LX, EX)

(LX-V6)

(EX-V6)

330

Tires

Maintenance

Wheels and Tires Winter Driving

268

15 x 6 JJ

15 x 6 1/2 JJ

16 x 6 1/2 JJ

P195/65R15 89H

P205/65R15 92V

P205/60R16 91V

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

If you mount snow tires on yourHonda, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas the original tires. Mount snowtires on all four wheels to balanceyour car’s handling in all weatherconditions. Keep in mind the tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay not be as high as your car’soriginal equipment tires. You shoulddrive cautiously even when the roadsare clear. Check with the tire dealerfor maximum speed recommenda-tions.

Mount traction devices (link-type orcable-type) only when required bydriving conditions or local laws.Make sure they are the correct sizefor your tires. Install them only onthe front tires.

If link-type traction devices are used,they must be SAE class ‘‘S’’. Cable-type traction devices can also beused.

Because your Honda has limited tireclearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’cable-type traction devices.

Link-type ‘‘chains’’ should not beused. No matter how tight they seemto be installed, they can come intocontact with the body andsuspension, causing serious damage.

When installing traction devices,follow the manufacturer’sinstructions and mount them astightly as you can. Drive slowly withthem installed. If you hear themcoming in contact with the body orchassis, stop and investigate. Makesure the traction devices areinstalled tightly, and that they arenot contacting the brakes orsuspension.Remove them as soon as you startdriving on cleared roads.

Snow Tires Tire Chains All Models

Tires

Maintenance 269

Traction devices that are the wrongsize or improperly installed candamage your car’s brake lines,suspension, body, and wheels. Stopdriving if they are hitting any part ofthe car.

Check the operation of your car’sexterior lights at least once a month.A burned out bulb can create anunsafe condition by reducing yourcar’s visibility and the ability tosignal your intentions to otherdrivers.

Lights

Maintenance270

HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTT HHIIGGHH BBEEAAMM

TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL//SSIIDDEEMMAARRKKEERR LLIIGGHHTT

HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTT LLOOWW BBEEAAMMPPAARRKKIINNGG LLIIGGHHTT

Check the following:

Headlights (low and high beam)Parking lightsTaillightsBrake lightsHigh-mount brake lightTurn signalsBack-up lightsHazard light functionLicense plate lightSide marker lightsDaytime running lights(Canadian models)

If you find any bulbs are burned out,replace them as soon as possible.Refer to the chart on pages and

to determine what type ofreplacement bulb is needed.

327329

Lights

Maintenance 271

TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL//TTAAIILLLLIIGGHHTT HHIIGGHH--MMOOUUNNTT BBRRAAKKEE LLIIGGHHTT

BBAACCKK--UUPP LLIIGGHHTTRREEAARR SSIIDDEE MMAARRKKEERR LLIIGGHHTT SSTTOOPP//TTAAIILLLLIIGGHHTT

LLIICCEENNSSEEPPLLAATTEE LLIIGGHHTTSS

Your car has two bulbs on each side,four in total. Make sure you arereplacing the bulb that is burned out.Your car uses halogen headlightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its plastic case and protect theglass from contact with your skin orhard objects. If you touch the glass,clean it with denatured alcohol and aclean cloth.

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your car was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk or pull a trailer, readjustmentmay be required. Adjustment of theheadlights should be performed by aHonda technician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Open the hood.

If you need to change the head-light bulb on the passenger’s side,remove the radiator reserve tankand the air intake duct.

If you need to change theheadlight bulb on the driver’s side,remove the radiator reserve tank.

1.

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

Replacing a Headlight BulbHeadlight Aiming

Lights

Maintenance272


AAIIRR IINNTTAAKKEEDDUUCCTT

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by squeezing theconnector to unlock the tab, thenslide the connector off the bulb.

Remove the bulb by turning itapproximately one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

Reinstall the radiator reserve tank.(Driver’s side)

Reinstall the radiator reserve tankand the air intake duct.

(Passenger’s side)

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

Insert the new bulb into the holeand turn it one-quarter turn clock-wise to lock it in place.

2.

3.

4.

7.

6.

5.

6-cylinder models

4-cylinder models

Lights

Maintenance 273

BBUULLBB

TTAABB

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Install the new bulb in the socket.Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

Remove the burned out bulb fromthe socket by pushing it in andturning counterclockwise until itunlocks.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

If you are changing the bulb onthe driver’s side, start the engine,turn the steering wheel all the wayto the right, and turn off theengine. If you are changing thebulb on the passenger’s side, turnthe steering wheel to the left.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the holding clip from theinner fender.

Pull the inner fender cover awayfrom the fender and bumper.

Put the inner fender cover in place.Install the holding clip. Lock it inplace by pushing on the center.

1.

3.

2.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Replacing Front Turn Signal andSide Marker Light Bulbs

Lights

Maintenance274

HHOOLLDDIINNGG CCLLIIPP

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

Open the hood. The front parkinglight is next to the headlight bulb.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the parking lights tomake sure the new bulb works.

(Passenger’s side)Reinstall the radiator reserve tank.

(Driver’s side)

If you need to change a bulb on

the driver’s side, remove theradiator reserve tank.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

(Driver’s side)Reinstall the power steering fluidtank.

Reinstall the radiator reserve tank.

If you need to change a bulb onthe passenger’s side, remove theradiator reserve tank. On thedriver’s side, remove the powersteering fluid tank.

2.

3.

1.

4.

5.

6.

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

4-cylinder models

Replacing a Parking Light Bulb

Lights

Maintenance 275

PPOOWWEERR SSTTEEEERRIINNGG FFLLUUIIDD TTAANNKK

HHOOLLDDEERR

Open the trunk.

Remove the fastener from the sideof the trunk lining by turning itcounterclockwise with a coin. Pullthe lining back.

Determine which of the two bulbsis burned out: stop/taillight or turnsignal/taillight.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.


Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.


Reinstall the trunk lining. Makesure it is installed under the edgeof the trunk seal.

1. 3.

2.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Replacing Rear Bulbs(in Fenders)

Maintenance

Lights

276

FFAASSTTEENNEERR

Open the trunk.

Remove the screw securing theplastic cover. Then remove theplastic cover.

Determine which of the two bulbsis burned out: stop/taillight orback-up light.

Put the fastener in the hole on theside of the trunk lining and pushon the center until it locks (thecenter is flush with the head).

1.

2.

3.

9.

CONTINUED

Replacing Rear Bulbs(in Trunk Lid)

Lights

Maintenance 277

SSCCRREEWW

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.


Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly.


Reinstall the plastic cover andsecure it with the screw. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to

loosen the side marker assemblymounting screw.

Remove the assembly from thefender by pulling out the backedge and sliding the assemblybackwards.

Remove the socket from the lightassembly by turning it counter-clockwise.

Remove the bulb from the socketby pulling it straight out.Install the new bulb. Turn on theheadlights to test the bulb.

1.

2.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

4.

3.

Replacing a Rear Side MarkerLight Bulb

Lights

Maintenance278

SSCCRREEWW

Insert the socket in the assembly.Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

Reinstall the side marker assem-bly in the bumper. Tighten themounting screw securely.

Open the trunk and remove thesocket from the light assembly byturning it one-quarter turn counter-clockwise.

Remove the burned-out bulb bypulling it straight out of the socket.Install the new bulb in the socket.

Reinstall the socket. Turn itclockwise until it locks.


1.

2.

3.5.

6. 4.

Replacing a High-mount BrakeLight Bulb

Lights

Maintenance 279

Turn on the parking lights andcheck that the new bulb isworking.

Put the lens back into the lightassembly, right side first. Push onthe left edge until it snaps intoplace.

Insert a flat blade screwdriverbetween the left edge of the lensand the housing. The lens willcome down.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb in untilit bottoms in the socket.

1. 2.

3.

4.

Replacing a Rear License PlateBulb

Lights

Maintenance280

The ceiling light, door light andvanity mirror light come apart thesame way, but they do not use thesame type of bulb.

Door light:Pry on the top middle of the lens.

Remove the lens by carefullyprying on the edge of the lens witha fingernail file or a small flat-tipscrewdriver. Do not pry on theedge of the housing around thelens.

Ceiling light:Pry on the front edge of the lensnear both sides.

1.

CONTINUED

Replacing Bulbs in the InteriorCourtesy Lights

Lights

Maintenance 281

CCEEIILLIINNGG LLIIGGHHTT DDOOOORR LLIIGGHHTT

Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of its metal tabs.

Push the new bulb into the metaltabs. Snap the lens back in place.

Open the trunk. Pull down thetrunk light cover.

Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of its metal tabs.

Push the new bulb into the metaltabs.

Push the cover back in place.

Spotlights:Pry on the front edge in front ofboth spotlights.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Replacing the Trunk Light Bulb

Lights

Maintenance282

SSPPOOTTLLIIGGHHTT

LLEENNSS

VVAANNIITTYY MMIIRRRROORR LLIIGGHHTT

TTRRUUNNKK LLIIGGHHTT

Block the rear wheels.

Fill the fuel tank.

Change the engine oil and filter(see page ).

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc. arecompletely dry.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in Reverse(5-speed manual) or Park(automatic).

If you need to park your car for anextended period (more than onemonth), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your car back on the road. Ifpossible, store your car indoors.

If the car is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe car is being stored indoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand trunk seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand trunk seals.

Cover the car with a ‘‘breathable’’cover, one made from a porousmaterial such as cotton.Nonporous materials, such asplastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

If possible, run the engine for awhile periodically (preferably oncea month).

If you store your car for 12 monthsor longer, have your Honda dealerperform the inspections called for inthe 24 months/30,000 miles (48,000km) maintenance schedule (NormalConditions) as soon as you take itout of storage (see page ). Thereplacements called for in themaintenance schedule are notneeded unless the car has actuallyreached that time or mileage.

232

220

Storing Your Car

Maintenance 283

Regular cleaning and polishing ofyour Honda helps to keep it ‘‘new’’looking. This section gives you hintson how to clean your car andpreserve its appearance: the paint,brightwork, wheels and interior. Alsoincluded are several things you cando to help prevent corrosion.

.................................Exterior Care . 286.....................................Washing . 286

.......................................Waxing . 287....................Aluminum Wheels . 287

..........................Paint Touch-up . 287..................................Interior Care . 288...................................Carpeting . 288.................................Floor Mats . 288

.........................................Fabric . 289...........................................Vinyl . 289

.......................................Leather . 289...................................Seat Belts . 289....................................Windows . 290

..........................Air Fresheners . 290....................Corrosion Protection . 291

.................................Body Repairs . 292

Appearance Care

Appearance Care 285

When you have washed and rinsedthe whole exterior, dry it with achamois or soft towel. Letting itair-dry will cause dulling and waterspots.

Fill a bucket with cool water. Mixin a mild detergent, such asdishwashing liquid or a productmade especially for car washing.

Only use the solvents and cleanersrecommended in this Owner’sManual.

Frequent washing helps preserveyour car’s beauty. Dirt and grit canscratch the paint, while tree sap andbird droppings can permanently ruinthe finish.

Rinse the car thoroughly with coolwater to remove loose dirt.

As you dry the car, inspect it forchips and scratches that could allowcorrosion to start. Repair them withtouch-up paint (see page ).

Wash the car using the water anddetergent solution and a soft-bristle brush, sponge, or soft cloth.Start at the top and work your waydown. Rinse frequently.

Check the body for road tar, treesap, etc. Remove these stains withtar remover or turpentine. Rinse itoff immediately so it does notharm the finish. Remember to re-wax these areas, even if the rest ofthe car does not need waxing.

Wash your car in a shady area, not indirect sunlight. If the car is parked inthe sun, move it into the shade andlet the exterior cool down before youstart.

287

Exterior Care

Appearance Care

Washing

286

Chemical solvents and strong cleanerscan damage the paint, metal, andplastic on your car.

－

－

Always wash and dry the whole carbefore waxing it. You should waxyour car, including the metal trim,whenever water sits on the surfacein large patches. It should form intobeads or droplets after waxing.

You should use a quality liquid orpaste wax. Apply it according to theinstructions on the container. Ingeneral, there are two types ofproducts:

Waxes A wax coats the finish andprotects it from damage by exposureto sunlight, air pollution, etc. Youshould use a wax on your Hondawhen it is new.

Polishes Polishes and cleaner/waxes can restore the shine to paintthat has oxidized and lost some of itsshine. They normally contain mildabrasives and solvents that removethe top layer of the finish. You

should use a polish on your Honda ifthe finish does not have its originalshine after using a wax.

Cleaning tar, insects, etc. withremovers also takes off the wax.Remember to re-wax those areas,even if the rest of the car does notneed waxing.

Clean your Honda’s aluminum alloywheels as you do the rest of theexterior. Wash them with the samesolution, and rinse them thoroughly.

The wheels have a protective clear-coat that keeps the aluminum fromcorroding and tarnishing. Usingharsh chemicals, including somecommercial wheel cleaners, or stiffbrushes can damage this clear-coat.Only use a mild detergent and softbrush or sponge to clean the wheels.

Your dealer has touch-up paint tomatch your car’s color. The colorcode is printed on a sticker on thedriver’s doorjamb. Take this code toyour dealer so you are sure to getthe correct color.

Inspect your car frequently for chipsor scratches in the paint. Repairthem right away to prevent corrosionof the metal underneath. Use thetouch-up paint only on small chipsand scratches. More extensive paintdamage should be repaired by aprofessional.

On some models

Exterior Care

Appearance Care

Waxing Paint Touch-up

Aluminum Wheels

287

Vacuum the carpeting frequently toremove dirt. Ground-in dirt will makethe carpet wear out faster.Periodically shampoo the carpet tokeep it looking new. Use one of thefoam-type carpet cleaners on themarket. Follow the instructions thatcome with the cleaner, applying itwith a sponge or soft brush. Keepthe carpeting as dry as possible bynot adding water to the foam.

If you remove the floor mat, makesure to re-anchor it when you put itback in your car.

If you replace it, use a genuineHonda floor mat that is designed tobe used with the floor mat anchor inyour car.

If you use a non-Honda floor mat inthe driver’s footwell, make sure itfits properly and that it can be usedwith the floor mat anchor.

Do not put additional floor mats ontop of the anchored mat, otherwisethe additional mats may slideforward and interfere with the pedals.

The Genuine Honda driver’s floormat that came with your car wasdesigned to be hooked over the floormat anchor. This keeps the floor matfrom sliding forward and possiblyinterfering with the pedals.

On all V6 models and the 4-cylinder EXmodel

Carpeting Floor Mats

Appearance Care

Interior Care

288

Vacuum dirt and dust out of thematerial frequently. For generalcleaning, use a solution of mild soapand lukewarm water, letting it air dry.To clean off stubborn spots, use acommercially-available fabric cleaner.Test it on a hidden area of the fabricfirst, to make sure it does not bleachor stain the fabric. Follow theinstructions that come with thecleaner.

Remove dirt and dust with a vacuumcleaner. Wipe the vinyl with a softcloth dampened in a solution of mildsoap and water. Use the samesolution with a soft-bristle brush onmore difficult spots. You can also usecommercially-available spray orfoam-type vinyl cleaners.

Vacuum dirt and dust from theleather frequently. Pay particularattention to the pleats and seams.Clean the leather with a soft clothdampened with clear water, thenbuff it with a clean, dry cloth. Iffurther cleaning is needed, use asoap specifically for leather, such assaddle soap. Apply this soap with adamp, soft cloth. Wipe down andbuff as described above.

If your seat belts get dirty, you canuse a soft brush with a mixture ofmild soap and warm water to cleanthem. Do not use bleach, dye, orcleaning solvents. They can weakenthe belt material. Let the belts air-dry before you use the car.

On some models

CONTINUED

Interior Care

Appearance Care

Fabric

Vinyl

Leather Seat Belts

289

LLOOOOPP

Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

Clean the windows, inside and out,with a commercially-available glasscleaner. You can also use a mixtureof one part white vinegar to ten partswater. This will remove the haze thatbuilds up on the inside of thewindows. Use a soft cloth or papertowels to clean all glass and clearplastic surfaces.

If you want to use an air freshener/deodorizer in the interior of your car,it is best to use a solid type. Someliquid air fresheners contain chemi-cals that may cause parts of theinterior trim and fabric to crack ordiscolor.

If you use a liquid air freshener,make sure you fasten it securely so itdoes not spill as you drive.

Interior Care

Appearance Care

Windows Air Fresheners

290

The rear window defogger andantenna wires are bonded to the insideof the glass. Wiping vigorously up-and-down can dislodge and break thesewires. When cleaning the rear window,use gentle pressure and wipe side-to-side.

Repair chips and scratches in thepaint as soon as you discover them.

Inspect and clean out the drainholes in the bottom of the doorsand body.

Check the floor coverings fordampness. Carpeting and floormats may remain damp for a longtime, especially in winter. Thisdampness can eventually causethe floor panels to corrode.

Two factors normally contribute tocausing corrosion in your car:

Moisture trapped in body cavities.Dirt and road salt that collects inhollows on the underside of thecar stays damp, promotingcorrosion in that area.

Removal of paint and protectivecoatings from the exterior andunderside of the car.

Many corrosion-preventive measuresare built into your Honda. You canhelp keep your car from corrodingby performing some simple periodicmaintenance:

Use a high-pressure spray to cleanthe underside of your car. This isespecially important in areas thatuse road salt in winter. It is also agood idea in humid climates andareas subject to salt air. Carsequipped with ABS have a sensorand wiring at each wheel. Becareful not to damage them.

Have the corrosion-preventivecoatings on the underside of yourcar inspected and repairedperiodically.

1.

2.

Corrosion Protection

Appearance Care 291

Make sure the repair facility usesgenuine Honda replacement bodyparts. Some companies make sheetmetal pieces that seem to duplicatethe original Honda body parts, butare actually inferior in fit, finish, andcorrosion resistance. Once installed,they do not give the same high-quality appearance.

Body repairs can affect your car’sresistance to corrosion. If your carneeds repairs after a collision, payclose attention to the parts used inthe repair and the quality of thework.

Take your car to your authorizedHonda dealer for inspection after therepairs are completed. Your dealercan make sure that quality materialswere used, and that corrosion-preventive coatings were applied toall repaired and replaced parts.

When reporting your collision to theinsurance company, tell them youwant genuine Honda parts used inthe repair. Although most insurersrecognize the quality of originalparts, some may try to specify thatthe repairs be done with otheravailable parts. You should investi-gate this before any repairs havebegun.

Body Repairs

Appearance Care292

This section covers the more-common problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your car towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 294....................Changing a Flat Tire . 295

..........If Your Engine Won’t Start . 301Nothing Happens or theStarter Motor Operates

............................Very Slowly . 301The Starter Operates

................................Normally . 302

................................Jump Starting . 303............If Your Engine Overheats . 306

.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 309..........Charging System Indicator . 310

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 311.......................Readiness Codes . 312

...............Brake System Indicator . 313..................Closing the Moonroof . 314

..............................................Fuses . 315..........Checking and Replacing . 316

......................Emergency Towing . 320

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Taking Care of the Unexpected 293

Follow these precautions wheneveryou are using the compact spare tire:

The compact spare tire has a shortertread life than a regular tire. Replaceit when you can see the tread wearindicator bars. The replacementshould be the same size and designtire, mounted on the same wheel.The compact spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the compact wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)under any circumstances.

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some road sur-faces than the regular tire. Usegreater caution while driving onthis tire.

Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare.

Your car has a compact spare tirethat takes up less space. Use thisspare tire as a temporary replace-ment only. Get your regular tirerepaired or replaced and put it backon your car as soon as you can.

The wheel of the compact sparetire is designed especially to fityour car. Do not use your sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

Turn off the Traction ControlSystem (see page ). Drivingwith the compact spare tire mayactivate the TCS.

203

On all V6 models

Compact Spare Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected294

IINNDDIICCAATTOORRLLOOCCAATTIIOONNMMAARRKK

TTRREEAADD WWEEAARRIINNDDIICCAATTOORRBBAARR60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Stopping in traffic or on the shoulderof a busy road is dangerous. Driveslowly along the shoulder until youget to an exit or an area to stop thatis far away from the traffic lanes.

Open the trunk. Raise the trunkfloor by lifting up on the back edge.

The tools are in the tool box onthe right side of the trunk. Takethe tools out of the tool box.

Park the car on firm, level andnon-slippery ground away fromtraffic. Put the transmission inPark (automatic) or Reverse(manual). Apply the parking brake.If you are towing a trailer, unhitchthe trailer.

Turn on the hazard warning lightsand turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0). Have all thepassengers get out of the car whileyou change the tire.

4.

3.

2.

1.

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat Tire


JJAACCKKSSPPAARREE TTIIRREE

TTRRUUNNKK FFLLOOOORR TTOOOOLL KKIITT

The car can easily roll off thejack, seriously injuring anyoneunderneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the car when itis supported only by the jack.

Loosen the wheel nuts (four forthe 4-cylinder models, five for theV-6 models) 1/2 turn with thewheel wrench.

Turn the jack’s end bracketcounterclockwise to loosen it, thenremove the jack.

Unscrew the wing bolt and takethe spare tire out of its well.

The jack is behind a cover in theright fender. Remove the cover byturning the handle counterclock-wise, then pulling on the cover.

7. 8.5.

6.



296

JJAACCKK

WWHHEEEELL NNUUTTSS

WWHHEEEELL WWRREENNCCHHCCOOVVEERR

△

CONTINUED

Remove the wheel nuts and flattire. Temporarily place the flat tireon the ground with the outsidesurface of the wheel facing up.You could scratch the wheel if youput it face down.

Use the extension and wheelwrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

Locate the jacking point nearestthe tire you need to change. It ispointed to by a mark moldedinto the underside of the body.Place the jack under the jackingpoint. Turn the end bracketclockwise until the top of the jackcontacts the jacking point. Makesure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

10. 11.9.



WWHHEEEELL WWRREENNCCHH

EEXXTTEENNSSIIOONN

JJAACCKKIINNGG PPOOIINNTT

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tightenthem fully.

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully, it may be hot fromdriving.

Do not attempt to forcibly pry thewheel cover off with a screwdriver orother tool. The wheel cover cannotbe removed without first removingthe wheel nuts.

12. 13.On LX and LX-V6 models



298

BBRRAAKKEE HHUUBB

WWHHEEEELL CCOOVVEERR

WWHHEEEELL NNUUTTSS

CONTINUED

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Lower the car to the ground andremove the jack.

15.14.




80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

Lower the trunk floor, then closethe trunk lid.

Store the wheel cover or centercap in the trunk. Make sure it doesnot get scratched or damaged.

Store the jack in its holder. Turnthe jack’s end bracket to lock it inplace. Replace the cover. Store thetools.

Place the flat tire face down in thespare tire well.

Remove the spacer cone from thewing bolt, turn it over, and put itback on the bolt.

Secure the flat tire by screwingthe wing bolt back into its hole.

Remove the center cap beforestoring the flat tire in the trunkwell.

17.

19.

18.

22.

20.

21.

16.On EX and EX-V6 models



300

WWIINNGG BBOOLLTT SSPPAACCEERRCCOONNEE

CCEENNTTEERR CCAAPP

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack and toolssecurely before driving.

Diagnosing why your engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn thekey to START (III):

When you turn the ignition switch toSTART (III), you do not hear thenormal noise of the engine trying tostart. You may hear a clicking soundor series of clicks, or nothing at all.Check these things:

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

Check the transmission interlock.If you have a manual transmission,the clutch pedal must be pushedall the way to the floor or thestarter will not operate. With anautomatic transmission, it must bein Park or Neutral.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).Turn on the headlights and checktheir brightness. If the headlightsare very dim or don’t light at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Turn the ignition switch to START(III). If the headlights do not dim,check the condition of the fuses. Ifthe fuses are OK, there is proba-bly something wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem. (See

on page .)

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery is dis-charged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe battery and terminal connec-tions (see page ). You canthen try jump starting the car froma booster battery (see page ).

303

256

303

320

If Your Engine Won’t Start

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Jump Starting

Emergency Towing


If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to START (III), butthe engine does not run.

Do you have fuel? Turn theignition switch to ON (II) for aminute and watch the fuel gauge.The low fuel level warning lightmay not be working, so you werenot reminded to fill the tank.

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

Your car has the ImmobilizerSystem. You should use aproperly-coded master or valet keyto start the engine (see page ).A key that is not properly codedwill cause the immobilizer systemindicator in the dash panel to blinkrapidly.

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

78

189

315

320Emergency

Towing

The Starter Operates Normally

Starting theEngine


If Your Engine Won’t Start

302

＋

＋

CONTINUED

If your car’s battery has run down,you may be able to start the engineby using a booster battery. Althoughthis seems like a simple procedure,you should take several precautions.

You cannot start a Honda with anautomatic transmission by pushingor pulling it.

To jump start your car, follow thesedirections closely:

Open the hood and check thephysical condition of the battery(see page ). In very coldweather, check the condition ofthe electrolyte. If it seems slushyor like ice, do not try jump startinguntil it thaws.

Turn off all the electrical acces-sories: heater, A/C, climatecontrol, stereo system, lights, etc.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark and set the parking brake.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourHonda’s battery. Connect theother end to the positive ( )terminal on the booster battery.

1.

2.

256

3.

Jump Starting



A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

－Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

4.

Jump Starting


66--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss 44--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss 66--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Once your car is running, discon-nect the negative cable from yourcar, then from the booster battery.Disconnect the positive cable fromyour car, then the booster battery.

The numbers in the illustration showyou the order to connect the jumpercables. Make sure to disconnect thecables in the reverse order.

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the vehicle until all aredisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

Start your car. If the starter motorstill operates slowly, check thejumper cable connections to makesure they have good metal-to-metal contact.

7.

6.

5.

Jump Starting


BBOOOOSSTTEERRBBAATTTTEERRYY

BBOOOOSSTTEERRBBAATTTTEERRYY44--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss 66--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark and set the parking brake.Turn off the heating and cooling/climate control system and allother accessories. Turn on thehazard warning indicators.

The pointer of your car’s tempera-ture gauge should stay in the mid-range under most conditions. It maygo higher if you are driving up a longsteep hill on a very hot day. If itclimbs to the red mark, you shoulddetermine the reason.

Your car can overheat for severalreasons, such as lack of coolant or amechanical problem. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.In either case, you should takeimmediate action.

1.

2.

If Your Engine Overheats


Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to your engine.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading(climbing a long, steep hill on ahot day with the A/C running, forexample), the engine should startto cool down almost immediately.If it does, wait until the tempera-ture gauge comes down to the mid-point then continue driving.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Wait until you see no more signsof steam or spray, then open thehood.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

If you don’t find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank (see page

). If the level is below theMIN mark, add coolant to halfwaybetween the MIN and MAX marks.

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may also have toadd coolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointerreaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

180

320

CONTINUED


EmergencyTowing


Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. Thisreleases any remaining pressure inthe cooling system. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap and turn it until it comesoff.

Start the engine and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum (climate control toFULL AUTO at 90°F/32°C). Addcoolant to the radiator up to thebase of the filler neck. If you donot have the proper coolantmixture available, you can addplain water. Remember to havethe cooling system drained andrefilled with the proper mixture assoon as you can.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine and watchthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair. (See

on page .)

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

9. 11.

12.

10.

320



EmergencyTowing

308

This indicator should light when theignition switch is ON (II), and go outafter the engine starts. It shouldnever come on when the engine isrunning. If it starts flashing, itindicates that the oil pressuredropped very low for a moment, thenrecovered. If the indicator stays onwith the engine running, it showsthat the engine has lost oil pressureand serious engine damage ispossible. In either case, you shouldtake immediate action.

Safely pull off the road and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning indicators.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

Start the engine and watch the oilpressure indicator. If the lightdoes not go out within ten seconds,turn off the engine. There is amechanical problem that needs tobe repaired before you cancontinue driving. (See

on page .)

Let the car sit for a minute. Openthe hood and check the oil level(see page ). Although oil leveland oil pressure are not directlyconnected, an engine that is verylow on oil can lose pressure duringcornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

1.

2.

3.

4.

178

230

320

Low Oil Pressure Indicator


EmergencyTowing

309

LLOOWW OOIILL PPRREESSSSUURREE IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe car stopped.

By eliminating as much of theelectrical load as possible, you candrive several miles (kilometers)before the battery is too dischargedto keep the engine running. Drive toa service station or garage whereyou can get technical assistance.

This indicator should come on whenthe ignition switch is ON (II), and goout after the engine starts. If itcomes on brightly when the engineis running, it indicates that thecharging system has stoppedcharging the battery.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories: radio, heater, A/C,climate control, rear defogger, cruisecontrol, etc. Try not to use otherelectrically-operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning and take extra care not tostall it. Starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.


Charging System Indicator

310

CCHHAARRGGIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch ON (II). If it comes on at anyother time, it indicates one of theengine’s emissions control systemsmay have a problem. Even thoughyou may feel no difference in yourcar’s performance, it can reduceyour fuel economy and cause yourcar to put out excessive emissions.Continued operation may causeserious damage.

If you have recently refueled yourcar, the cause of this indicatorcoming on could be a loose ormissing fuel fill cap. Check the capand tighten it until it clicks severaltimes. Replace the fuel fill cap if it ismissing. Tightening the cap will notmake the indicator turn offimmediately; it takes at least threedriving trips.

If the indicator remains on past threedriving trips, or the fuel cap was notloose or missing, have the carchecked by the dealer as soon aspossible. Drive moderately until thedealer has inspected the problem.Avoid full-throttle acceleration anddriving at high speed.

You should also have the dealerinspect your car if this indicatorcomes on repeatedly, even though itmay turn off as you continue driving.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp


MMAALLFFUUNNCCTTIIOONN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLAAMMPP

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your car’s emissions controlsand engine. Those repairs may not becovered by your car’s warranties.

Your car has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If your car’s battery has beendisconnected or gone dead, thesecodes are erased. It takes severaldays of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.

If possible, do not take your car for astate emissions test until thereadiness codes are set. See StateEmissions Testing on page .

To check if they are set, turn theignition ON (II), but do not start theengine. The Malfunction IndicatorLamp will come on for 20 seconds. Ifit then goes off, the readiness codesare set. If it blinks 5 times, thereadiness codes are not set.

337

For 4-cylinder ULEV and V-6 models

Readiness Codes

Malfunction Indicator Lamp


＊＊

＊＊

If it comes on at any other time, itindicates a problem with the car’sbrake system. In most cases, theproblem is a low fluid level in thebrake fluid reservoir. Press lightly onthe brake pedal to see if it feelsnormal. If it does, check the brakefluid level the next time you stop at aservice station (see page ). If thefluid level is low, take the car to yourdealer and have the brake systeminspected for leaks or worn brakepads.

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. Because of thebrake system’s dual-circuit design, aproblem in one part of the systemwill still give you braking at twowheels. You will feel the brake pedalgo down much farther before the carbegins to slow down, and you willhave to press harder on the pedal.The distance needed to stop will bemuch longer.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of thelonger distance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the car. Youshould have it towed, and repaired assoon as possible. (See

on page .)

If you must drive the car a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and cautiously.

The Brake System Indicatornormally comes on when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). It is areminder to check the parking brake.It comes on and stays lit if you do notfully release the parking brake.

246320

EmergencyTowing

Brake System Indicator


BBRRAAKKEE SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

UU..SS.. iinnddiiccaattoorr sshhoowwnn

Use a screwdriver or coin toremove the round plug in thecenter of the headliner.

Remove the wrench. Replace theround plug.

If the electric motor will not closethe moonroof, do the following:

Check the fuse for the moonroofmotor (see page ). If the fuseis blown, replace it with one of thesame or lower rating.

Try closing the moonroof. If thenew fuse blows immediately or themoonroof motor still does notoperate, you can close themoonroof manually.

Insert the moonroof wrench intothe socket behind this plug. Turnthe wrench until the moonroof isfully closed.

Get the moonroof wrench out ofthe tool kit in the trunk.

5.

6.

4.

1.

2.

3.

315

Closing the Moonroof


SSOOCCKKEETTRROOUUNNDD PPLLUUGG

The under-hood fuse box is locatedin the back of the engine compart-ment on the passenger’s side. Toopen it, push the tabs as shown.

All the electrical circuits in your carhave fuses to protect them from ashort circuit or overload. Thesefuses are located in three fuse boxes.

The interior fuse boxes are locatedon each side of the dashboard. Toopen an interior fuse box, open thecar door. Pull the cover open, thentake it out of its hinges by pulling ittoward you.

Fuses


IINNTTEERRIIOORR UUNNDDEERR--HHOOOODD TTAABB

CCOOVVEERR

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK(0). Make sure the headlights andall other accessories are off.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse box bylooking through the top at the wireinside. Removing these fusesrequires a Phillips-head screw-driver.

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse boxes bypulling out each fuse with the fusepuller provided in the under-hoodfuse box.

If something electrical in your carstops working, the first thing youshould check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

and , or the diagram on thefuse box lid, which fuse or fusescontrol that component. Check thosefuses first, but check all the fusesbefore deciding that a blown fuse isnot the cause. Replace any blownfuses and check the component’soperation.

3.1.

2.

4.

318 319

Checking and Replacing Fuses

Fuses


BBLLOOWWNN

FFUUSSEE PPUULLLLEERR

FFUUSSEE

Look for a burned wire inside thefuse. If it is burned, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

If you cannot drive the car withoutfixing the problem, and you do nothave a spare fuse, take a fuse of thesame rating or a lower rating fromone of the other circuits. Make sureyou can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem in your car.Leave the blown fuse in thatcircuit and have your car checkedby a qualified mechanic.

If the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio youwill see ‘‘ ’’ in the frequencydisplay. Use the Preset buttons toenter the five-digit code (see page

).

5.

6.

171

CONTINUED


Fuses


BBLLOOWWNN

Replacing a fuse with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have a replace-ment f use with the proper rating f or thecircuit, install one with a lower rating.

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

－

－

－＊＊＊＊＊

→→←← No.Circuits ProtectedNo. Amps. Amps. Circuits Protected

123456

7891011

1213141516

Fuel PumpSRSHeater Control, A/C ClutchRelay, Cooling Fan RelayPower MirrorDaytime Running LightECU (ECM/PCM), CruiseControlSRS, MoonroofACC RelayBack-up Lights, MeterLightsTurn SignalsIG CoilWiperStarter Signal

123

456

789

10111213

15 A10 A7.5 A

7.5 A7.5 A15 A

7.5 A7.5 A7.5 A

7.5 A15 A30 A7.5 A

On Canadian models

30 A20 A

20 A

10 A20 A20 A20 A20 A15 A7.5 A

20 A7.5 A7.5 A20 A

MoonroofPower SeatNot UsedPower SeatNot UsedDaytime Running LightLAF HeaterMoonroof RelayPassenger’s Power WindowRadio, ACC SocketSmall Light, License LightInterior Light, CourtesyLightsPower Door LocksClock, Back UpABS Motor CheckDriver’s Power WindowNot Used

1 :2 :3 :4 :

EX, EX-V6LX-V6, EX, EX-V6Canadian modelsU.S. models except LX

1

2

2

3

4

1

2

Fuses


Driver’s Side

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

Passenger’s Side

FFrroonnttFFrroonntt

:

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊＊＊

No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected

12345678910111213

20 A7.5 A20 A20 A20 A15 A30 A15 A20 A30 A

100 A20 A40 A

Left HeadlightDimmer RelayRight HeadlightABS F/SStopACGABS MotorHazardSpare FuseSpare FuseBatteryCooling FanBack Up, ACC

1415161718192021222324

40 A40 A20 A40 A40 A7.5 A10 A15 A20 A20 A50 A

Power Window MotorPower SeatTCS F/SHeater MotorRear DefrosterSpare FuseSpare FuseSpare FuseHeated SeatCondenser FanIG1 Main

1 : EX-V6 in Canada2 : EX, V6 models3 : V6 models4 : Canadian EX and EX-V6 models

1

2

2

3

4

Fuses


UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

－

－

－

Release the parking brake.Start the engine.Shift to D , then to N.Turn off the engine.

If your car needs to be towed, call aprofessional towing service or, if youbelong to one, an organization thatprovides roadside assistance. Nevertow your car behind another vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

The operatorloads your car on the back of a truck.

The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the tires (front or rear) and liftthem off the ground. The other twotires remain on the ground.

The towtruck uses metal cables with hookson the ends. These hooks go aroundparts of the frame or suspension andthe cables lift that end of the car offthe ground. Your car’s suspensionand body can be seriously damaged.

If your Honda cannot be transportedby flat-bed, it should be towed bywheel-lift equipment with the frontwheels off the ground. If due todamage, your car must be towedwith the front wheels on the ground,do the following:

Release the parking brake.Shift the transmission to Neutral.

With the front wheels on the ground,it is best to tow the car no fartherthan 50 miles (80 km), and keep thespeed below 35 mph (55 km/h).

There are three popular types ofprofessional towing equipment.

4



Flat-bed Equipment

Wheel-lif t Equipment

Sling-type Equipment

This is the best way to transportyour Honda.

This isan acceptable way to tow yourHonda.

This method of towing isunacceptable.

Emergency Towing


Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshif t the transmission or start theengine (automatic transmission), yourcar must be transported with the f rontwheels of f the ground.

If you decide to tow your car with allfour wheels on the ground, makesure you use a properly-designed andattached tow bar. Prepare the car fortowing as described above, and leavethe ignition switch in Accessory (I)so the steering wheel does not lock.Make sure the radio and any itemsplugged into the accessory powersocket are turned off so they do notrun down the battery.

Emergency Towing


The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in Accessory (I), andmake sure the steering wheel turnsf reely bef ore you begin towing.

Trying to lif t or tow your car by thebumpers will cause serious damage.The bumpers are not designed tosupport the car’s weight.

－－

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour Honda, and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 324Specifications

..................(4-cylinder Models) . 326Specifications

..................(6-cylinder Models) . 328DOT Tire Quality Grading

.............................(U.S. Cars) . 330.................................Treadwear . 330

...........Traction AA, A, B, C . 330

...........Temperature A, B, C . 331.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 332

......Driving in Foreign Countries . 333

.......................Emissions Controls . 334.....................The Clean Air Act . 334

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 334

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 334

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 334

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 335....................PGM-FI System . 335

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 335

Exhaust Gas Recirculation...................(EGR) System . 335

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 335

....................Replacement Parts . 335..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 336

..............State Emissions Testing . 337

Technical Information

Technical Information 323

Your car has several identifyingnumbers located in various places.

The Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourHonda dealer uses to register yourcar for warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour car. The easiest place to findthe VIN is on a plate fastened to thetop of the dashboard. You can see itby looking through the windshieldon the driver’s side. It is also on theCertification label attached to thedriver’s doorjamb, and is stamped onthe engine compartment bulkhead.The VIN is also provided in bar codeon the Certification label.

Identif ication Numbers

Technical Information324

VVEEHHIICCLLEE IIDDEENNTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN NNUUMMBBEERR

CCEERRTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN LLAABBEELL

The Transmission Number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

The Engine Number is stamped intothe engine block. It is on the front.

Identif ication Numbers


MMAANNUUAALLTTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONNNNUUMMBBEERR

EENNGGIINNEE NNUUMMBBEERR

AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICC TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN NNUUMMBBEERR44--ccyylliinnddeerr MMooddeellss

66--ccyylliinnddeerr MMooddeellssEENNGGIINNEE NNUUMMBBEERR

AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICC TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN NNUUMMBBEERR

－－

＊

＊

＊

＊


Specifications (4-cylinder Models)

326

Dimensions

Weights

Capacities

Air Conditioning

187.7 in (4,767 mm)70.3 in (1,785 mm)54.9 in (1,395 mm)105.1 in (2,670 mm)61.2 in (1,555 mm)60.4 in (1,535 mm)

1.82 US gal (6.9 , 1.52 Imp gal)1.85 US gal (7.0 , 1.54 Imp gal)


5.9 US qt (5.6 , 4.9 Imp qt)HFC-134a (R-134a)

24.7 26.5 oz (700 750 g)

4.5 US qt (4.3 , 3.8 Imp qt)

4.2 US qt (4.0 , 3.5 Imp qt)

ND-OIL8 2.0 US qt (1.9 , 1.7 Imp qt)2.1 US qt (2.0 , 1.8 Imp qt)2.6 US qt (2.5 , 2.2 Imp qt)6.4 US qt (6.1 , 5.4 Imp qt)

2.6 US qt (2.5 , 2.2 Imp qt)

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengine.Reserve tank capacity:0.16 US gal (0.6 , 0.13 Imp gal)Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.

4.8 US qt (4.5 , 4.0 Imp qt)

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

Gross vehicle weight rating

Fuel tank

Enginecoolant

Engine oil

Manual trans-mission oilAutomatictransmissionfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

FrontRear

Approx.

1 :

2 :

ChangeManualAutomatic

TotalManualAutomatic

ChangeIncludingfilterWithoutfilter

TotalChangeTotalChangeTotal

U.S. CarsCanada Cars

17.12 US gal (64.8 , 14.26 Imp gal)1

2

－

－－－

－－－－－－－－－－－－

－－



327

Lights

Battery

Engine

Alignment

Tires

Fuses

9.3 : 1138 cu-in (2,254 cm )

3.39 x 3.82 in (86.0 x 97.0 mm)12 V

12 V12 V

24/2.2 CP

32/2 CP32/2 CP

12 V12 V

60 W (HB3)51 W (HB4)

12 V

12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V

3 CP

21 W3 CP3 CP8 W21 W5 W3 CP1.8 W4 CP

12 V 52 AH/5 HR

0.00 in (0.0 mm)0.08 in (2.0 mm)

0°0°30’

2°48’

P195/65R15 89HT125/70D15 95M

29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Headlights

Front turn signal/side markerlightsFront parking lightsRear turn signal/taillightsStop/TaillightsBack-up lightsRear side marker lightsLicense plate lightsCeiling lightHigh-mount brake lightTrunk lightDoor courtesy lightsVanity mirror lightSpotlights

Capacity

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

Size

Pressure

Water cooled 4-strokeSOHC VTEC

4-cylinder gasoline engine

65 AH/20 HR

Interior

Under-hood

See spark plug maintenance sec-tion page 252 .

12 V

See page 318 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door on each side of thedashboard.See page 319 or the fuse boxcover.

FrontRearFrontRearFront

HighLow

Front/RearSpareFront/RearSpare

－－

＊

＊

＊

＊



328

Dimensions

Weights

Capacities

Air Conditioning

187.7 in (4,767 mm)70.3 in (1,785 mm)55.3 in (1,405 mm)105.1 in (2,670 mm)61.2 in (1,555 mm)60.4 in (1,535 mm)

HFC-134a (R-134a)

ND-OIL8

4.6 US qt (4.4 , 3.9 Imp qt)

4.2 US qt (4.0 , 3.5 Imp qt)

5.3 US qt (5.0 , 4.4 Imp qt)3.1 US qt (2.9 , 2.6 Imp qt)7.6 US qt (7.2 , 6.3 Imp qt)

2.6 US qt (2.5 , 2.2 Imp qt)4.8 US qt (4.5 , 4.0 Imp qt)

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengine.Reserve tank capacity:0.16 US gal (0.6 , 0.13 Imp gal)Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

Gross vehicle weight rating

Fuel tank

EnginecoolantEngine oil

AutomatictransmissionfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

15.8 17.5 oz (450 500 g)


FrontRear

Approx.

1 :

2 :

ChangeTotalChange

IncludingfilterWithoutfilter

TotalChangeTotal

U.S. CarsCanada Cars

17.12 US gal (64.8 , 14.26 Imp gal)1

2

－

＊＊

－－－

－－－－－－－－－－－－

－－

＊

＊

＊

＊



329

Lights

Battery

Engine

Alignment

Tires

Fuses

12 V12 V

60 W (HB3)51 W (HB4)

12 V

12 V12 V12 V

4 CP

5 W

24/2.2 CP

12 V

21 W

55 AH/5 HR12 V

12 V1.8 W

3 CP

12 V

12 V

32/2 CP32/2 CP

12 V

12 V

3 CP

3 CP3 CP

12 V

12 V12 V

21 W8 W

3.39 x 3.39 in (86.0 x 86.0 mm)183 cu-in (2,997 cm )

9.4 : 1

0.00 in (0.0 mm)0.08 in (2.0 mm)

0°0°30’

2°48’

P205/60R16 91VP205/65R15 92V

T135/90D15 100M32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Headlights

Front turn signal/side markerlightsFront parking lightsRear turn signal/taillightsStop/TaillightsBack-up lightsRear side marker lightsLicense plate lightsCeiling lightHigh-mount brake lightTrunk lightDoor courtesy lightsVanity mirror lightSpotlights

Capacity

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

Size

Pressure

Water cooled 4-strokeSOHC VTEC

6-cylinder gasoline engine

65 AH/20 HR12 V

Interior

Under-hood

See spark plug maintenance sec-tion page 255 .

See page 318 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door on each side of thedashboard.See page 319 or the fuse boxcover.

FrontRearFrontRearFront

HighLow

1 :2 :

Front/Rear

SpareFront/Rear

Spare

EX-V6LX-V6

1

2

1

2

－The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

The tires on your car meet all U.S.Federal Safety Requirements. Alltires are also graded for treadwear,traction, and temperature perform-ance according to Department ofTransportation (DOT) standards.The following explains thesegradings.

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and themaximum section width. Forexample:

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.


DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Cars)

Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

DOT Quality Grades

330

－ Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, cancause heat buildup and possible tirefailure.

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.


DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Cars)

Temperature A, B, C

331

Some conventional gasolines arebeing blended with alcohol or anether compound. These gasolinesare collectively referred to asoxygenated fuels. To meet clean airstandards, some areas of the UnitedStates and Canada use oxygenatedfuels to help reduce emissions.

If you use an oxygenated fuel, besure it is unleaded and meets theminimum octane rating requirement.

Before using an oxygenated fuel, tryto confirm the fuel’s contents. Somestates/provinces require thisinformation to be posted on thepump.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

Fuel system damage or performanceproblems resulting from the use ofan oxygenated fuel containing morethan the percentages of oxygenatesgiven above are not covered underwarranty.

(methyl or woodalcohol)Your vehicle was not designed to usefuel that contains methanol.Methanol can corrode metal parts inthe fuel system, and also damageplastic and rubber components. Thisdamage would not be covered byyour warranties.

(ethyl or grain alcohol)You may use gasoline containing upto 10 percent ethanol by volume.Gasoline containing ethanol may bemarketed under the name ‘‘Gasohol.’’

The following are the U.S. EPA andCanadian CGSB approvedpercentages of oxygenates:

(Methyl Tertiary ButylEther)You may use gasoline containing upto 15 percent MTBE by volume.

Oxygenated Fuels


METHANOL

ETHANOL

MTBE

332

If you are planning to take yourHonda outside the U.S. or Canada,contact the tourist bureaus in theareas you will be traveling in to findout about the availability of unleadedgasoline with the proper octanerating.

If unleaded gasoline is not available,be aware that using leaded gasolinein your Honda will affect perfor-mance and fuel mileage, and damageits emissions controls. It will nolonger comply with U.S. andCanadian emissions regulations, andwill be illegal to operate in NorthAmerica. To bring your car back intocompliance will require the replace-ment of several components, such asthe oxygen sensors and the threeway catalytic converter. These re-placements are not covered underwarranty.

Driving in Foreign Countries


＊

＊

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.Scheduled maintenance is on page

.

In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards (CMVSS) forEmissions valid at the time they aremanufactured.

The burning of gasoline in your car’sengine produces several byproducts.Some of these are carbon monoxide(CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx) andhydrocarbons (HC). Gasolineevaporating from the tank alsoproduces hydrocarbons. Controllingthe production of NOx, CO, and HCis important to the environment.Under certain conditions of sunlightand climate, NOx and HC react toform photochemical ‘‘smog.’’ Carbonmonoxide does not contribute tosmog creation, but it is a poisonousgas.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

Your car has a Positive CrankcaseVentilation System. This keepsgasses that build up in the engine’scrankcase from going into theatmosphere. The Positive CrankcaseVentilation valve routes them from

the crankcase back to the intakemanifold. They are then drawn intothe engine and burned.

220

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery


Emissions Controls

334

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), dinitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

The Exhaust Gas Recirculation(EGR) system takes some of theexhaust gas and routes it back intothe intake manifold. Adding exhaustgas to the air/fuel mixture reducesthe amount of NOx produced whenthe fuel is burned.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO and NOx produced.

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,Ignition Timing Control, ExhaustGas Recirculation and Three WayCatalytic Converter. These foursystems work together to control theengine’s combustion and minimizethe amount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcomes out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The PGM-FI System uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection.It has three subsystems: Air Intake,Engine Control, and Fuel Control.The Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module (PCM-A/T only) uses various sensors todetermine how much air is goinginto the engine. It then controls howmuch fuel to inject under all

operating conditions.The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newGenuine Honda replacement parts ortheir equivalent for repairs. Usinglower quality parts may increase theemissions from your car.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your car. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

2

2

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System

Ignition Timing Control System


Emissions Controls

335

Keep the engine tuned-up.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire any com-bustible materials that come near it.Park your car away from high grass,dry leaves, or other flammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your car’s three way catalyticconverter.

Have your car diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Three Way Catalytic Converter


TTHHRREEEE WWAAYY CCAATTAALLYYTTIICC CCOONNVVEERRTTEERR

CONTINUED

If you take your vehicle for a stateemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not complete thetest. This is because of certain‘‘readiness codes’’ that must be set inthe on-board diagnostics for theemissions systems. These codes areerased when the battery isdisconnected, and set again onlyafter several days of driving under avariety of conditions.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle re-tested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for re-testingby doing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 8hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 20° and95°F.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine and let itidle for 20 seconds.

Keep the vehicle in Park(automatic transmission) orNeutral (manual transmission).Increase the engine speed to 2,000rpm and hold it there until thetemperature gauge rises to at least1/4 of the scale (approximately 3minutes).

State Emissions Testing


Testing of Readiness Codes

337

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour Honda dealer.

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD (A/T) or 5th (M/T). Do notuse the cruise control. Whentraffic allows, drive for 90 secondswithout moving the acceleratorpedal. (Vehicle speed may varyslightly; this is okay.) If you cannotdo this for a continuous 90seconds because of trafficconditions, drive for at least 30seconds, then repeat it two moretimes (for a total of 90 seconds).

4

State Emissions Testing


Customer Relations................................Information . 340

...................U.S. Zone Office Map . 341.............Canada Zone Office Map . 342

....................Warranty Coverages . 343Reporting Safety Defects

..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 344.....................Authorized Manuals . 345

Warranty and Customer Relations

Warranty and Customer Relations 339

When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. TheService Manager or GeneralManager can help. Almost allproblems are solved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact your HondaCustomer Relations Zone Office.Refer to the U.S. and Canadian ZoneOffice maps on the following pages.

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )Name and address of the dealerwho services your carDate of purchaseMileage on your carYour name, address, and tele-phone numberA detailed description of theproblemName of the dealer who sold thecar to you

324

Customer Relations Information

Warranty and Customer Relations340

６

７

８

９

１０

１５

１

２

３

４

５

U.S. Zone Office Map


ZONE 1

ZONE 9

ZONE 6

ZONE 3

ZONE 10

ZONE 7

ZONE 5

ZONE 2

ZONE 15

ZONE 4ZONE 2 ZONE 8

Mid-Atlantic Zone902 Wind River Ln., Suite 200

Gaithersburg, Maryland 20878(301) 990-2020

Puerto Rico and U.S. V.I.Bella International

P.O. Box 190816San Juan, PR 00919-0816(787) 250-4318

Western ZoneP.O. Box 2260

700 Van Ness AvenueTorrance, California90501-1490(310) 781-4565

Northeastern Zone115 Gaither Drive

Mt. Laurel, New Jersey 08054(856) 235-5533Includes: NYC Metro area andFairfield County, CT area

Central Zone101 South Stanfield Road

Troy, Ohio 45373(937) 332-6250

South Central Zone4529 Royal Lane

Irving, Texas 75063(972) 929-5481

Northwestern ZoneP.O. Box 20186

12439 N.E. Airport WayPortland, Oregon 97230(503) 256-0943(also includes Alaska andHawaii)

Southeastern ZoneP.O. Box 1606

1500 Morrison ParkwayAlpharetta, Georgia 30009-1606(770) 442-2045

New England Zone555 Old County Road

Windsor Locks, Connecticut 06096(860) 623-3310See Zone 5 for: NYC Metro area andFairfield County, CT area

West Central Zone1600 South Abilene Street, Suite D

Aurora, Colorado 80012(303) 696-3935

North Central Zone601 Campus Drive, Suite A-9

Arlington Heights, Illinois 60004(847) 870-5600

The addresses and telephone numbers are subject to change. If you cannotreach your Zone office, ask your Honda dealer for the current information.

Canada Zone Office Map


CUSTOMER RELATIONSRELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÈLE

Honda Canada Inc.National Office

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9

Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909Toronto (416) 287-4776

－－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered for the useful life of thevehicle.

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from a Honda dealer.

Your new Honda is covered by thesewarranties:

covers all genuineHonda replacement parts againstdefects in materials and workman-ship.

Genuine Honda Accessories arecovered under this warranty. Timeand mileage limits depend on thetype of accessory and other factors.Please read your warranty manualfor details.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2001 Honda Warranty Informationbooklet that came with your car forprecise information on warrantycoverages. Your Honda’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2001 WarrantyManual that came with your car.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’s emis-sions control systems. Time, mileage,and coverage are conditional. Pleaseread the warranty manual for exactinformation.

this warranty gives upto 100 percent credit toward areplacement battery.

Seat Belt Limited Warranty Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited WarrantyNew Vehicle Limited Warranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

Warranty Coverages


To contact NHTSA, you may eithercall the Auto Safety Hotline toll-freeat 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 inWashington D.C. area) or write to:NHTSA, U.S. Department ofTransportation, Washington,D.C. 20590. You can also obtainother information about motorvehicle safety from the Hotline.

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)


－

＊

＊

＊

＊２００１

ＨＯＮ

The following publications covering the operation andservicing of your vehicle can be obtained from HelmIncorporated, either by filling out the attached form or,for credit card holders, calling the toll-free phone numberon the form. For manuals prior to the year shown below,contact Helm Incorporated, P.O. Box 07280, Detroit,Michigan 48207, or call 1-800-782-4356.

Valid only for sales within the U.S. Canadian owners shouldcontact their authorized Honda dealer.

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals(U.S. only)

345

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356

OR

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)

MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00

Publication

Form Number

61S8008

61S8009

61S8008EL

61S8030

31S82630

HON-R

Form Description

1998-2001 Honda Accord 2/4 Door L4

Service Manual Base Book

1998-2001 Honda Accord 2/4 Door V6

Service Manual Supplement

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

Body Repair Manual

2001 Honda Accord 2 Door L4/V6

Owner’s Manual

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

Price

Each

$66.00

$36.00

$46.00

$40.00

$30.00

FREE

1998-2001 Honda Accord 2/4 Door L4/V6

1998-2001 Honda Accord 2/4 Door L4/V6

PUBLICATION NUMBERVEHICLE MODEL

Name YearQty

Price

Each

Total

Price

GRAND TOTAL

HANDLING CHARGE

Mich. Purchases

Add 6% Sales Tax

TOTAL MATERIAL

$6.00

Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST

By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You canpay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail toHelm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurring obligation.

Orders are mailed within 10 days. Pleaseallow adequate time for delivery.Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring

obligation.

－

－

－

ＳＨＩＰ

ＴＯ

ＰＡＹＭＥＮＴ

This manual complements the Service Manual byproviding in-depth troubleshooting information for eachelectrical circuit in your vehicle.

This manual describes the procedures involved in thereplacement of damaged body parts.

This manual covers maintenance and recommendedprocedures for repair to engine and chassis components.It is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simpleenough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

Authorized Manuals

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

346

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment shouldbe sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shownbelow for a quotation.

P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356

Customer Name Attention

Apartment Number

State & Zip CodeCity

Daytime Telephone Number

Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.Do not send cash

MasterCard

VISA Check here if your billing address is differentfrom the shipping address shown above.

Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE

Street Address No P.O. Box Number

( )

These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.

CONTINUED

...Accessories and Modifications . 182................................Accessories . 182

.Additional Safety Precautions . 183............................Modifications . 183

ACCESSORY (Ignition Key.......................................Position) . 81

.............Accessory Power Socket . 113....................Additives, Engine Oil . 232

...............................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 45.....................Air Cleaner Element . 249

.................Air Conditioning Filter . 262......Air Conditioning System . 118, 125

..............................Maintenance . 261.................................Usage . 121, 127

...............Air Outlets (Vents) . 120, 125

.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 264

.......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 332.......Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning . 287

......................................Antifreeze . 235Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

...............................Indicator . 59, 201...................................Operation . 200

..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 171.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 80

..........................Appearance Care . 285........................Audio System . 133, 148

...Automatic Lighting Off Feature . 68

...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 43...............Automatic Speed Control . 74

..............Automatic Transmission . 192..................Capacity, Fluid . 326, 328

...............Checking Fluid Level . 243.......................................Shifting . 193

.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 193................Shift Lever Positions . 193

....................Shift Lock Release . 196

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 58, 310............................Jump Starting . 303

..............................Maintenance . 256....................Specifications . 327, 329

..............................Before Driving . 173....................................Belts, Seat . 8, 41

...........................Beverage Holder . 110...................................Body Repair . 292

Brakes...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 200

.............Break-in, New Linings . 174............Bulb Replacement . 276, 277

...........................................Fluid . 246.......................................Parking . 108

.................System Indicator . 59, 313........................Wear Indicators . 199

.............................Braking System . 199........................Break-in, New Car . 174

..Brightness Control, Instruments . 69........................Brights, Headlights . 67

Bulb Replacement..........................Back-up Lights . 277

.....................Brake Lights . 276, 277..............................Ceiling Light . 281

........................Courtesy Lights . 281................Front Parking Lights . 275

........Front Side Marker Lights . 274.................................Headlights . 272

.........High-mount Brake Light . 279.................License Plate Lights . 280

.........Rear Side Marker Lights . 278....................Specifications . 327, 329

Index

A

B

I

＊

Bulb Replacement...................................Spotlights . 281

...............................Trunk Light . 282....................Turn Signal Lights . 274

..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 272

...................Capacities Chart . 326, 328.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 52

.............................Carrying Cargo . 184Cassette Player

............................................Care . 160...........................Operation . 145, 156

..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii..........................CD Changer . 142, 161

.......................................CD Player . 140..................................Ceiling Light . 114

...............................Center Pocket . 113........................Certification Label . 324

............................................Chains . 269Changing Oil

........................................How to . 232......................................When to . 220

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 295............Changing Engine Coolant . 237

...Charging System Indicator . 58, 310............Checklist, Before Driving . 188

.....................................Child Safety . 20.......................................Child Seats . 25

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 40....................Cleaner Element, Air . 249

Cleaning....................Aluminum Wheels . 287

...................................Carpeting . 288......................................Exterior . 286

.........................................Fabric . 289.......................................Interior . 288.......................................Leather . 289

...................................Seat Belts . 289...........................................Vinyl . 289

....................................Windows . 290...............Climate Control System . 125

.........................Clock, Setting the . 109...................................Clutch Fluid . 247

........................CO in the Exhaust . 334........................................Coin Box . 113

............Cold Weather, Starting in . 190..............................Compact Spare . 294

.................Console Compartment . 111...............Consumer Information . 340

.............Controls, Instruments and . 55

Coolant........................................Adding . 235

....................................Checking . 180.........................Proper Solution . 235

...................................Replacing . 237...................Temperature Gauge . 64

....................Corrosion Protection . 291............................Courtesy Lights . 115

Crankcase Emissions Control........................................System . 334

..............Cruise Control Operation . 74..........Customer Relations Office . 341

................DANGER, Explanation of . ii...................................Dashboard . 2, 56

................Daytime Running Lights . 68............Defects, Reporting Safety . 344

................Defogger, Rear Window . 72

......Defrosting the Windows . 123, 131............................Dimensions . 326, 328

...............Dimming the Headlights . 67Dipstick

..........Automatic Transmission . 243..................................Engine Oil . 178

Index

C

D

II

CONTINUED

..........................Directional Signals . 69........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 199

.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 234Doors

..............Locking and Unlocking . 81..............................Monitor Light . 61

......................Power Door Locks . 81..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 330

Downshifting, 5-speed Manual.............................Transmission . 191

.....................................Drive Belts . 262...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

...........................................Driving . 187....................................Economy . 181

.........................In Bad Weather . 205................In Foreign Countries . 333

............................Fabric, Cleaning . 289..........................Fan, Interior . 118, 129

Features, Comfort and..............................Convenience . 117

....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 175Filters

................................Air Cleaner . 249.......................Air Conditioning . 262

...............................................Oil . 2325-speed Manual Transmission

...............Checking Fluid Level . 245................................Shifting the . 191

.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 71...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 295

.....................................Floor Mats . 288Fluids

..........Automatic Transmission . 243..........................................Brake . 246

..............................Economy, Fuel . 181............Emergencies on the Road . 293.............Battery, Jump Starting . 303...........Brake System Indicator . 313

................Changing a Flat Tire . 295.....Charging System Indicator . 310

..................Checking the Fuses . 315

.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 309Malfunction Indicator

......................................Lamp . 311...Manually Closing Moonroof . 314

..................Overheated Engine . 306.........................Emergency Brake . 108

......................Emergency Flashers . 71......................Emergency Towing . 320

............Emergency Trunk Opener . 87.......................Emissions Controls . 334

.............Emissions Testing, State . 337Engine

....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 64.................................Drive Belts . 262

Malfunction Indicator................................Lamp . 59, 311

........Oil Pressure Indicator . 58, 309

..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 230...............................Overheating . 306

....................Specifications . 327, 329

....................Speed Limiter . 192, 196.......................................Starting . 189

......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 332.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 334

...............................Exhaust Fumes . 52

Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat........................................Belts by . 18

..................Exterior, Cleaning the . 286

Index

E

F

III

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 324Ignition

..............................................Keys . 77...........................................Switch . 80

Fluids.........................................Clutch . 247

..............Manual Transmission . 245..........................Power Steering . 248

................Windshield Washers . 242FM Stereo Radio

...........................Reception . 134, 149.........................Folding Rear Seat . 100

.....Foreign Countries, Driving in . 333..........................Four-way Flashers . 71

..............................Front Airbags . 9, 45.................................................Fuel . 174

......................Fill Door and Cap . 175...........................................Gauge . 64

................Octane Requirement . 174...............................Oxygenated . 332

........................Reserve Indicator . 62........................Tank, Filling the . 175

.....................Fuses, Checking the . 315

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 181..........................................Gasohol . 332.........................................Gasoline . 174

...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 62

...........................................Gauge . 64................Octane Requirement . 174

........................Tank, Filling the . 175................Gas Station Procedures . 175

Gauges...Engine Coolant Temperature . 64

...............................................Fuel . 64...............................Speedometer . 63

.................................Tachometer . 63GAWR (Gross Axle Weight

......................................Rating) . 208Gearshift Lever Positions

..........Automatic Transmission . 1935-speed Manual

.........................Transmission . 191..............................Glass Cleaning . 290

........................................Glove Box . 88GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight

......................................Rating) . 208

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 272..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 71

........................................Headlights . 67........................................Aiming . 272

Automatic Lighting Off.....................................Feature . 68

............Daytime Running Lights . 68..................High Beam Indicator . 62

....................Lights On Indicator . 62.........................Reminder Chime . 67

........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 272...................................Turning on . 67

..............................Head Restraints . 99.....................Heating and Cooling . 118

.............High Altitude, Starting at . 190.................High-Low Beam Switch . 67

HomeLink Universal.................................Transmitter . 89

....................................Hood Latch . 251.......................Hood, Opening the . 176

..................................................Horn . 66...........................Hydraulic Clutch . 247

.................................Hydroplaning . 206

Index

G H I

IV

CONTINUED

............Timing Control System . 335........................Immobilizer System . 78

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 57

...............................Infant Restraint . 20......................................Infant Seats . 29

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 40...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 264

.................................Inside Mirror . 106.............................Inspection, Tire . 265

........................Instrument Panel . 2, 56........Instrument Panel Brightness . 69

...........................Interior Cleaning . 288...............................Interior Lights . 114

........................................Introduction . i

..................................................Keys . 77

.......................Label, Certification . 324.................Lane Change, Signaling . 69

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 15, 41Lights

....................Bulb Replacement . 272.......................................Indicator . 57

.........................................Parking . 67..................................Turn Signal . 69

.....................................Load Limit . 185......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 80

........................Lockout Prevention . 82Locks

.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 80............................Fuel Fill Door . 175

....................................Glove Box . 88.................................Power Door . 81

...........................................Trunk . 86........................Low Coolant Level . 180

...Lower Gear, Downshifting to a . 191...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 58, 309

Lubricant Specifications..................................Chart . 326, 328.........................................Luggage . 184

...................Neutral Gear Position . 195..................New Vehicle Break-in . 174

.....................Normal Shift Speeds . 192

........................Jacking up the Car . 297.......................................Jack, Tire . 296

................................Jump Starting . 303

..................................Maintenance . 215...Owner Maintenance Checks . 227

.................................Record . 225-226......................Required Indicator . 65

..........................................Safety . 216.............................Schedule . 220-224

Malfunction Indicator....................................Lamp . 59, 311

...................Manual Transmission . 191........Manual Transmission Fluid . 245

...............................Meters, Gauges . 63...................Methanol in Gasoline . 332

........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 106.......................................Moonroof . 105

......................Closing Manually . 314...................................Operation . 105

Index

K

L

J

M

N

V

...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i...............Numbers, Identification . 324

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 174.........................................Odometer . 63

...............................Odometer, Trip . 64Oil

........................Change, How to . 232......................Change, When to . 220......................Checking Engine . 178..............Pressure Indicator . 58, 309

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 231

...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 81Onboard Refueling Vapor

....................................Recovery . 334..Operation in Foreign Countries . 333

............................Outside Mirrors . 106....................Overheating, Engine . 306

.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 227.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 332

..............................Paint Touch-up . 287..............Panel Brightness Control . 69

........................Park Gear Position . 194...........................................Parking . 198

...............................Parking Brake . 108Parking Brake and Brake

.................System Indicator . 59, 313.................................Parking Lights . 67

..Parking Over Things that Burn . 198.............................PGM-FI System . 335

..................Polishing and Waxing . 287............Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 11

.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 18..................Proper Seat Belt Usage . 15

............................Protecting Adults . 12...Additional Safety Precautions . 19

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18........................Protecting Children . 20.......................Protecting Infants . 29

.......Protecting Larger Children . 36.........Protecting Small Children . 33

Using Child Seats with.....................................Tethers . 40

...................Radiator Overheating . 306Radio/Cassette/CD Changer

............................Sound System . 148.............Radio/CD Sound System . 133

...................Readiness Codes . 312, 337..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 276

............................Rear Seat Access . 98........................Rear Seat, Folding . 100

..........................Rear View Mirror . 106.................Rear Window Defogger . 72.........Reclining the Seat Backs . 94, 97

.......Recommended Shift Speeds . 192.............................Reminder Lights . 57

................Remote Audio Controls . 170.......................Remote Transmitter . 83

Replacement Information.................Air Cleaner Element . 249

.............Air Conditioning Filter . 262..........................Engine Coolant . 237

................Engine Oil and Filter . 232..........................................Fuses . 316

................................Light Bulbs . 272.............................Schedule . 218-224

.......................Spark Plugs . 251, 253

Index

O

P R

VI

＊＊

CONTINUED

................................Timing Belt . 263...........................................Tires . 267

.............................Wiper Blades . 259Replacing Seat Belts After a

............................................Crash . 44...Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant . 180

...............................Restraint, Child . 20..................Reverse Gear Position . 194

................................Rotation, Tire . 267

..................................Safety Belts . 8, 41.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 344

.................................Safety Features . 7...........................................Airbags . 9

..................................Door Locks . 10..........................Head Restraints . 10

.......................................Seat Belts . 8.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 10

.............Safety Labels, Location of . 53...............................Safety Messages . ii

.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 41...............Additional Information . 41

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 43

.....................................Cleaning . 289................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 15, 41

................................Maintenance . 44Reminder Light and

................................Beeper . 41, 58...................System Components . 41

...............Use During Pregnancy . 18...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 15

........................Seats, Adjusting the . 94..................................Seat Heaters . 102

............................Security System . 172...............................Serial Number . 324

...........................Service Intervals . 220

...........................Service Manual . 345.........Service Station Procedures . 175

..........................Setting the Clock . 109.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 193

........................Shift Lock Release . 196....................................Side Airbags . 47

...............Side Airbag Indicator . 49, 60Side Marker Lights, Bulb

..............................Replacement . 278...............................Signaling Turns . 69

.....................................Snow Tires . 269...................Solvent-type Cleaners . 286

........................Sound System . 133, 148

Spare Tire......................................Inflating . 294

....................Specifications . 327, 329........Spark Plugs, Replacing . 251, 253

...........Specifications Charts . 326, 328..................................Speed Control . 74...................................Speedometer . 63

.......................................Spotlights . 114..........SRS, Additional Information . 45

...Additional Safety Precautions . 50Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 43How the SRS Indicator

.......................................Works . 48...........How Your Airbags Work . 45

........................SRS Components . 45..................................SRS Service . 50

.............................SRS Indicator . 48, 60....START (Ignition Key Position) . 81

.......................Starting the Engine . 189In Cold Weather at High

..................................Altitude . 190................With a Dead Battery . 303..............State Emissions Testing . 337

Index

S

VII

........Steam Coming from Engine . 306Steering Wheel

..................................Adjustment . 73.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 80

...........Stereo Sound System . 133, 148...........................Storing Your Car . 283

........................................Sun Visor . 112........................Sunglasses Holder . 109

Supplemental Restraint..................................System . 9, 45......................................Servicing . 50

.........................SRS Indicator . 48, 60...................System Components . 45

..................................Synthetic Oil . 232

.....................................Tachometer . 63......Taillights, Changing Bulbs in . 276

.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 293...........................Tape Player . 145, 156

Technical Descriptions......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 330.....Emissions Control Systems . 334

.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 332

Three Way Catalytic...............................Converter . 336

.......................Temperature Gauge . 64..............Tether Anchorage Points . 40

............................Theft Protection . 171..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 336

..........................Time, Setting the . 109....................................Timing Belt . 263....................................Tire Chains . 269

.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 295...............................................Tires . 264

..............................Air Pressure . 264.........................Checking Wear . 265..........................Compact Spare . 294

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 330......................................Inflation . 264

..................................Inspection . 265..............................Maintenance . 266

...................................Replacing . 267......................................Rotating . 267

...........................................Snow . 269....................Specifications . 327, 329

................................Tire Chains . 269..........................Winter Driving . 268

...................Tools, Tire Changing . 295

Towing.....................................A Trailer . 207

................Emergency Wrecker . 320Traction Control System (TCS)

...............................Indicator . 60, 204...................................Operation . 202

TransmissionChecking Fluid Level,

..............................Automatic . 243...................................Manual . 245

..................Fluid Selection . 244, 245..............Identification Number . 325.............Shifting the Automatic . 193

..................Shifting the Manual . 191.....................................Treadwear . 330.......................................Trip Meter . 64

................................................Trunk . 86........Emergency Trunk Release . 87

.................................Opening the . 86...................Open Monitor Light . 61

....................................Turn Signals . 69

Index

T

VIII

＊＊

.....................Underside, Cleaning . 291Unexpected, Taking Care

..........................................of the . 293....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 330

........................Unleaded Gasoline . 174.....................Upholstery Cleaning . 289

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 234

................................Vanity Mirror . 112.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 185

.............Vehicle Dimensions . 326, 328....Vehicle Identification Number . 324

.............................Vehicle Storage . 283.............................Ventilation . 121, 125

.................................................VIN . 324...............................Vinyl Cleaning . 289

..................................Viscosity, Oil . 231

.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 53

..................Warranty Coverages . 343Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 242.......................................Indicator . 62

Washer, Windshield.....................................Operation . 71

.........................................Washing . 286..................Waxing and Polishing . 287

Wheels...............Adjusting the Steering . 73............Alignment and Balance . 266

..........................Compact Spare . 294......................................Wrench . 296

Windows.....................................Cleaning . 290

................Operating the Power . 103...........................Rear, Defogger . 72

Windshield.......................................Cleaning . 70...........................Defroster . 123, 131

.......................................Washers . 71Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 259.....................................Operation . 70

....................................Worn Tires . 265.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 321

: U.S. and Canada only

Index

U

V

W

IX

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

5-speed Manual TransmissionFluid:

Power Steering Fluid:

Brake Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 86 or higher.

Capacity:2.0 US qt (1.9 , 1.7 Imp qt)

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

Spare Tire:60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Honda Manual TransmissionFluid preferred, or an API serviceSG, SH or SJ, SAE 10W-30 or10W-40 motor oil as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page ).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

4.5 US qt (4.3 , 3.8 Imp qt)

4.6 US qt (4.4 , 3.9 Imp qt)

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) preferred, ora DEXRON III ATF as atemporary replacement (see page

).

LX, EX

LX-V6, EX-V6

LX, EXFront/Rear:

LX-V6Front/Rear:

EX-V6Front/Rear:

230

245

248

246

244

17.12 US gal (64.8 , 14.26 Imp gal)

2001 Accord Coupe Online Reference Owner's...

Documents

Transcript of 2001 Accord Coupe Online Reference Owner's...